JP6739801B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game and executes an effect based on the determination result.

For example, in a pachinko game machine, when a game ball wins at the starting opening, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and various effects are displayed when the symbols for informing the determination result are variably displayed. Is executed (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2017-79840, A

By the way, the production performed by the conventional gaming machine is not necessarily highly entertaining, and there is room for improvement in terms of improving the interest.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a highly entertaining effect.

The present invention adopts the following configurations in order to solve the above problems.
A gaming machine according to the present invention executes a special game, which determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, and the special game when the determination unit determines to execute the special game. with a special game execution means, a presentation control means for controlling the effect, and the effect control means can perform control by repeating a predetermined number of times a given effect to perform an operation using a predetermined image, said executed repeatedly The predetermined effect is executed from when the predetermined image is displayed in the first predetermined mode or when the predetermined image is displayed in the second predetermined mode different from the first predetermined mode, and the predetermined image is displayed in the predetermined effect. A first change effect in which the specific image changes from the current display mode to the first predetermined mode by performing the operation used, and a second change in which the specific image changes from the current display mode to the second predetermined mode by performing the operation using the predetermined image There is an effect and a maintenance effect in which an operation using a predetermined image is performed to maintain the current display mode of the specific image, and the effect pattern for executing the predetermined effect has the first change as the first predetermined effect. A first effect pattern for executing an effect, a second effect pattern for executing the second change effect as the first predetermined effect, and a sustain effect for the first predetermined effect, and the second predetermined effect. A third effect pattern that executes the second change effect as effect, and a fourth effect pattern that executes the maintenance effect as the first predetermined effect and execute the maintenance effect as the second predetermined effect. Yes, when the predetermined effect is executed in the fourth effect pattern, the degree of expectation that the special game is executed does not increase, and when the predetermined effect is executed in the first effect pattern, the special effect is set. The degree of expectation that the game will be executed is increased, and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second effect pattern, the special game is executed more than when the predetermined effect is executed in the first effect pattern. When the degree of expectation rises and the predetermined effect is executed in the third effect pattern, the degree of expectation that the special game is executed is higher than when the predetermined effect is executed in the first effect pattern. ..

According to the present invention, it is possible to execute a highly entertaining effect.

Schematic front view of gaming machine 1 Schematic view of small winning opening 19, large winning opening 13, slide member 17 Enlarged view of display 4 in FIG. Block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device provided in the gaming machine 1 Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot and the game state Explanatory drawing for explaining various tables used for special symbol determination Screen diagram illustrating the screen configuration of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the normal gaming state Explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of reach production Screen diagram for explaining the relationship between the decorative design and the small design Screen diagram showing a specific example of a series of effects that develop into SPSP reach through SP reach (Part 1) Screen diagram showing a specific example of a series of effects that develop into SPSP reach through SP reach (Part 2) Screen diagram showing a specific example of a series of effects that develop into SPSP reach through SP reach (Part 3) Explanatory drawing which illustrates the flow of the said icon production performed using the said icon. Screen diagram showing a concrete example of icon change success production Screen diagram showing specific examples of rewinding suggestion production and failure rewinding production Screen diagram showing a concrete example of high-order icon change success production Explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of reach rewind production Screen view showing a specific example of reach rewind production Screen diagram showing a specific example of reach reproduction effect performed after the reach rewind effect Explanatory diagram illustrating an end condition for ending the time saving game state Time chart for explaining screen display during small hit game Screen diagram showing a concrete example of screen display during small hit game Screen diagram illustrating the screen configuration of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the time saving game state Explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the RUSH challenge battle Time chart for explaining the effect and display mode of small symbols that are performed during the RUSH challenge battle Screen diagram showing a specific example of the RUSH Challenge Battle (Part 1) Screen diagram showing a specific example of the RUSH challenge battle (Part 2) Screen diagram showing a specific example of the RUSH challenge battle (Part 3) Screen diagram showing a specific example of the RUSH challenge battle (Part 4) Screen diagram showing specific example of RUSH challenge battle (Part 5) Explanatory drawing which illustrates the flow of the rewinding effect performed at the 1st time saving speed when the time saving frequency is set to 5 times. Block diagram illustrating the configuration of the main RAM 103 and various information stored in the main RAM 103 Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the game control board 100 A detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. A detailed flowchart of the first starting opening switch process in step S21 of FIG. A detailed flowchart of the second starting opening switch process in step S22 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the preliminary determination process in steps S218 and S229 of FIGS. Detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S24 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. 39. Detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S310 of FIG. 39. Detailed flowchart of the processing during stoppage in step S319 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of normal symbol processing in step S4 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the slide member control process in step S5 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the small winning opening opening control process in step S6 of FIG. 33 (No. 1) Detailed flowchart of the small winning opening opening control process in step S6 of FIG. 33 (Part 2) Detailed flowchart of the special winning opening opening control process in step S7 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the game state setting process in step S745 of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process executed in the effect control board 130 A detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the hold command reception process in step 103 of FIG. A detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S106 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the process during opening of the small winning opening in step S33 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the result effect control process in step S43 of FIG. 49. The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the image acoustic control board 140. A detailed flowchart of the image output control processing in step 71 of FIG. 55.

Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as "gaming machine 1") according to an embodiment of a gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Schematic Configuration Example of Gaming Machine 1]
First, the schematic configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 is configured as a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1 type 2 mixed type. As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 is provided with a gaming board 2 provided with winning prizes, determination-related accessories, and the like, and a frame member 3 surrounding the gaming board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined interval, and the glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which a game ball can flow down. Has been done.

The upper plate 28 collects game balls and prize balls to be supplied to a launching device (not shown). The lower plate 29 is for accumulating game balls as prize balls paid out from the gaming machine 1. When the player operates the take-out button 23, a part of the lower surface of the lower plate 29 is opened to form the game balls. Is discharged. In addition, these dishes 28 and 29 may be comprised by one dish.

In the gaming machine 1, when the player holds the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 in the clockwise direction, the game ball guided from the upper plate 28 to the launching device has a ball hitting force corresponding to the rotation angle of the lever 21 in the game area. Fired to the upper position at 10. The game area 10 is provided with a game nail, a windmill, and the like (not shown), and the game ball that is fired along the game board 2 changes its moving direction by contacting the game nail, the windmill, and the like. To fall. It should be noted that when the player operates the stop button 22, the firing of the game ball is temporarily stopped.

When "left hitting" is performed with the lever 21 rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is shot with a relatively weak hitting force, and flows down the left side area in the game area 10 as illustrated by an arrow 31. To do. On the other hand, when "right hitting" is performed with the lever 21 rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is shot with a relatively strong hitting force, and the right side area in the game area 10 is exemplified by the arrow 32. Flow down.

A first starting opening 11 and three ordinary winning openings 14 are provided on the passage path of the game ball that has been left-handed as a winning prize or determination. On the other hand, in the passage path of the game ball that has been hit to the right, there are gates 16, small winning holes 19, one ordinary winning opening 14, a large winning opening 13, a second starting opening 12, and a slide as a winning/judging character. A member 17 is provided.

The game ball shot into the game area 10 flows down the game area 10 along the game board 2, and in the process of flowing, the first start opening 11, the second start opening 12, the large winning opening 13, the small winning opening 19, and the ordinary. There are cases where a player wins by winning a ball in one of the winning openings 14. In this case, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the place where the prize is won are paid out to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29. The game balls that have not won the prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

The first starting opening 11 is a starting area that is always open, and when a game ball passes through the first starting opening 11 and wins a prize, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (so-called big hit of one kind), and the determination result Is displayed on the first special symbol display device 41 (see FIG. 3) of the display device 4. Here, when the symbol indicating the big hit (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed, a plurality of round games (seven times in this embodiment: see FIG. 6C) for opening the special winning opening 13 are executed.

The second starting port 12 is a starting region that is always open, and in front of the second starting port 12, a guide member that guides the game ball moving on the slide member 17 to the second starting port 12. 64 (see FIGS. 2B and 2C). When the game ball is guided to the guide member 64 by the slide member 17 as an ordinary electric accessory, the game ball wins the second starting opening 12 (FIGS. 2(C-2) to (C-5)). reference). On the other hand, when the game ball is not guided to the guide member 64 by the slide member 17, the game ball does not win the second starting opening 12.

In the gaming machine 1, when a gaming ball passes through the second starting opening 12 and wins a prize, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (so-called per type) or a small hit (so-called per 2 types), and the determination result Is displayed on the second special symbol display 42 (see FIG. 3) of the display 4. Here, when the jackpot pattern for notifying that it is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, a plurality of round games using the jackpot 13 for all round games are executed.
On the other hand, when the small hit symbol for informing that it is a small hit is stopped and displayed, a small hit game using the small winning opening 19 and a round game after the second round using the large winning opening 13 are executed. R.

As will be described in detail later, a V winning opening switch 198 (see FIG. 2) is provided inside the small winning opening 19. This V winning opening switch 198 forms a V winning opening that, when a small hit occurs, regards the small hit game as the first round and starts the round games of the second and subsequent rounds.
When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the second round is provided on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening switch 198 (that is, V winning) during the small winning game in which the small winning opening 19 is opened. The game starts. In this case, at the end of the jackpot game composed of the second round and later round games, the gaming state shifts from the "normal gaming state" to the "time saving gaming state". On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass the V winning opening switch 198 in the small winning opening 19 during the small hitting game, the round game after the second round is not executed, and the gaming state is "time saving. It does not shift to "gaming state".

In the following description, the determination executed on condition that the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 11 is called "first special symbol determination", and the winning of the playing ball to the second starting opening 12 is conditional. The determination to be executed is called "second special symbol determination", and these determinations are generically called "special symbol determination".
Further, in the following description, for the sake of convenience of description, an advantageous game that is advantageous for a player and is made up of an open game that opens the small winning opening 19 is called a “small hit game”, and a round game that opens the large winning opening 13 The advantageous game that is advantageous to the player that is configured is called a "big hit game", and the two are distinguished.

<Great prize hole 13>
The special winning opening 13 is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination (the big winning symbol for notifying that it is per type is stopped and displayed). In addition, the big winning opening 13 is displayed with a small winning symbol that informs that it is per 2 types, and the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 during the small winning game executed according to this (V winning. ) Is also open.
A slide member 38 (see FIG. 2B) that is slidable in the depth direction of the gaming machine 1 is provided at the opening of the special winning opening 13. The special winning opening 13 is normally closed by this slide member 38. On the other hand, if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), or if the game ball wins V during the small hit game, the slide member 38 is The jackpot game in which the special winning opening 13 is opened by sliding to the back of the gaming machine 1 is executed. During the jackpot game, until the predetermined condition (in the present embodiment, winning of 10 game balls into the special winning opening 13 or 29.5 seconds after the special winning opening 13 is opened), the special winning opening A long open round game in which 13 is kept open and then closed is executed a predetermined number of times at predetermined time intervals.

It should be noted that the jackpot game is also executed when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 in the small winning opening 19 during the small winning game, but in this case, the small winning that is digested using the small winning opening 19 The game is regarded as the first round, and the second and subsequent rounds of the big hit game are exhausted using the special winning opening 13.
On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hit game, the big hit game is not started.

During the jackpot game, a long open round game in which the big winning opening 13 is long opened is executed, and for example, 12 prize balls are paid out each time a game ball is won in the big winning opening 13, so that the player is a big hit game. By hitting right inside, you can get more prize balls than when big hit game is not played.

<About the structure of the small prize hole 19>
2(A-1) to (A-3) are schematic perspective views showing the internal structure of the small winning opening 19. The small winning opening 19 is opened when it is determined to be a small hit in the second special symbol determination. As illustrated in FIG. 2, a slide member 191 slidable in the depth direction of the gaming machine 1 is provided at the opening of the small winning opening 19. The small winning port 19 is normally closed by this slide member 191. On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 42, the small hit game in which the slide member 191 slides to the back side of the gaming machine 1 to open the small winning opening 19 is executed. It During the small hitting game, the slide member 191 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern (see FIG. 21) in which the small winning opening 19 is opened 10 times over a period of 15 seconds after the small winning opening 19 is opened. The open game of the small hit game to be operated is executed. Also, during this open game, if 10 game balls are won in the small winning opening 19 (the 10th game ball is detected by the small winning opening switch 194 (see FIG. 2)), the slide member 191. Is stopped, and the small hit game ends. Also, when the operation of the slide member 191 in the predetermined opening pattern is completed (that is, when 15 seconds have elapsed after the small winning port 19 was opened), the small hit game is ended.

During the opening game, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 21, the slide member 191 operates in an opening pattern in which a short opening operation of opening the small winning opening 19 for 0.044 seconds and then closing it is repeated 10 times. To do.

During the small hitting game, the small prize hole 19 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern, and for example, 12 prize balls are paid out each time a game ball is won in the small prize hole 19, so that the player is in the small hit game. By hitting to the right, more prize balls can be obtained compared to when the small hit game is not performed.

By the way, the game ball hit right moves on the small winning opening 19 (on the slide member 191) as illustrated by an arrow 33 (see FIG. 1). Although not shown in the figure above the small winning opening 19, the left wall that abuts when the game ball moves to the back side of the game machine 1, and the game ball moves to the front side of the game machine 1. The right wall, which abuts when the above is performed, is provided at a predetermined interval. Then, on the left wall and the right wall, there is provided a restriction piece 192 that projects toward the center in the width direction (depth direction of the gaming machine 1) of the slide member 191 that closes the small winning opening 19 (FIG. 2). Therefore, the game ball flows down on the slide member 191 so as to meander while contacting the left and right restricting pieces 192 (see the arrow in FIG. 2(A-1)). As a result, it is possible to lengthen the time that the game ball stays on the slide member 191 as compared with the case where the restriction piece 192 is not provided. Therefore, during the opening game in which the slide member 191 operates in a predetermined opening pattern (see FIG. 21) during the opening game, the game ball that has reached the slide member 191 during the closing of the small winning hole 19 is the small winning hole 19 Can remain on the slide member 191 until it is subsequently opened. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing over the slide member 191 without winning the small prize hole 19 during the small hit game, and the opening time of the small prize hole 19 is 0.044. Even if the time is very short, it is possible to easily win the game ball to the small winning opening 19.

In addition, as illustrated in FIGS. 2A-1 to 2A-3, inside the small winning opening 19, a small winning opening switch 194, a lost winning opening switch 197, a V winning opening switch 198, and A slide member 195 is provided.

When the small hit game is not played, the small winning opening 19 is closed by the slide member 191, the V winning opening switch 198 is opened, and the lost winning opening switch 197 is closed by the slide member 195 (FIG. 2). (See (A-1)).

On the other hand, when the opening game which constitutes the small hit game is started, the slide member 191 slides to the back side of the gaming machine 1 and the small winning opening 19 is opened (FIG. 2(A-2). reference). In the state where the small winning opening 19 is opened, as illustrated in FIG. 2(A-2), after the game ball that has entered the small winning opening 19 passes through the small winning opening switch 194, the restricting member After moving on 195 and the right inclined portion 196, the V winning opening switch 198 is passed (see the arrow in FIG. 2(A-2)). Then, if even one of the V winning opening switch 198 is passed by the game ball, the round game after the second round in which the big winning opening 13 is opened is performed.
In addition, the game ball that has entered the small winning opening 19 may pass through the small winning opening switch 194 after moving on the left inclined portion 193.

During the opening game of the small hit game, the number of game balls passing through the small winning opening switch 194 is counted, and the slide member 195 is provided on condition that the ninth gaming ball has passed through the small winning opening switch 194. Slides to the back of the gaming machine 1 and the lost winning a prize mouth switch 197 is opened (see FIG. 2(A-3)). Therefore, the tenth game ball that has entered the small winning opening 19 during the small hit game is guided to the lost winning opening switch 197 instead of the V winning opening switch 198.

The slide member 191 is moved to a position where the small winning opening 19 is opened, and then the operation in a predetermined opening pattern is completed, or 10 game balls have passed through the small winning opening switch 194. It returns to the position where the small winning opening 19 is closed.

In this way, the small hitting game ball can easily pass through the game ball to the V winning opening switch 198. Therefore, as long as the player makes a right hit, the big hitting game following the small hitting game can be easily performed. It can occur.

In addition, a large letter "V" is written on a member provided at a position corresponding to an area in which the small winning opening switch 194, the lost winning opening switch 197, the V winning opening switch 198 and the like are included, and V A small letter "V" is written at a position corresponding to the winning opening switch 198 (see FIG. 1).

Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the small winning opening 19 is a V attacker including the V winning opening switch 198 by looking at the large letter "V". Further, the position of the V winning opening switch 198 (the position of the V area) can be easily identified by looking at the small letter "V". The above members are made of a transparent acrylic member or the like, and the player inserts the small winning opening switch 194, the slide member 195, the lost winning opening switch 197, the V winning opening switch 198, etc. through the acrylic member. It is visible.

<Slide member 17>
2B is a schematic front view illustrating the configuration of the slide member 17 and its periphery, and FIGS. 2C-1 to 2C-5 are schematic plan views of the slide member 17. In the right side area of the game area 10, a slide member 17 for guiding the game ball to the second starting opening 12 is provided between the restriction wall 63 and the guide member 64. The slide member 17 is configured to be movable between a storage position (see FIG. 2C-1) and a guide position (see FIG. 2C-2). Here, the guide position is such that the slide member 17 is projected from the surface of the game board 2 to the right side region, so that the guide member 64 supports the game ball flowing down the right side region as shown by an arrow 36, for example. It is a position where the game ball can be guided to. One storage position is a position where the slide member 17 does not project from the surface of the game board 2, as illustrated in FIG. 2(C-1).

As illustrated in FIG. 2B, in the state where the special winning opening 13 is closed by the slide member 38, the game ball that has passed over the slide member 38 collides with the regulation wall 61 and is above the inclined member 62. After falling onto the inclined member 62 and moving on the inclined member 62, it collides with another regulation wall 63. Here, if the slide member 17 is in the guide position, the game ball that collides with the restriction wall 63 falls to the left end portion of the slide member 17. However, the slide member 17 is usually arranged at the storage position (see FIG. 2C-1). Therefore, the game ball that collides with the restriction wall 63 falls along the restriction wall 63 and is finally discharged from the game area 10 via the discharge port 18.

On the right side of the slide member 17, a guide member 64 that guides the game ball that has moved on the slide member 17 to the second starting opening 12 is provided (FIGS. 2C-1 and 2C-2). reference). The guide member 64 has a bottom portion 641 that supports the game ball, and a wall portion 642 that is curved so that the game ball that has moved from the slide member 17 to the top of the bottom portion 641 can be guided to the inner side of the gaming machine 1. (See FIG. 2C-1).

In the state where the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position (see FIG. 2(C-2)), the game ball colliding with the restriction wall 63 falls to the left end portion of the slide member 17. The slide member 17 is inclined so that the game ball supported by the slide member 17 can be guided to the guide member 64 (see FIG. 2(B)). Therefore, if the state in which the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position continues for a predetermined time (about 1.2 seconds in the present embodiment) or more, the game ball that has moved on the slide member 17 reaches the guide member 64. Then, the second starting opening 12 is won.

As described above, the second starting port 12 is a starting region that is always open, but when the slide member 17 is arranged at the storage position or when the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position for a predetermined time. If the above is not continued, the game ball colliding with the restriction wall 63 falls without reaching the guide member 64. Therefore, normally, the game ball does not win the second starting opening 12.
On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 16, it is determined whether or not the slide member 17 should be operated, although the prize ball is not paid out. Here, when it is determined that the slide member 17 is to be operated, the operation of returning to the storage position is performed a specified number of times when a specified time has elapsed after the slide member 17 moved to the guide position. In this way, the second starting port 12 does not win the game ball when the slide member 17 is arranged at the storage position, whereas the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position and the state continues for a predetermined time or longer. By doing so, the game ball can be won.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is controlled in a "normal game state" or a "time saving game state" described later. When it is determined that the slide member 17 is operated when the game is controlled in the "time saving game state", the operation of returning to the storage position is performed when 1.92 seconds have elapsed after the slide member 17 was placed at the guide position. It will be held twice.
FIG. 2C-2 is a schematic plan view showing a state where the game ball has dropped to the left end portion of the slide member 17 immediately after the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position. FIG. 2(C-3) exemplifies the position of the game ball at the timing 0.5 seconds after the slide member 17 is placed at the guide position, and FIG. 2(C-4) shows the slide member 17 It illustrates the position of the game ball at the timing when 1.0 seconds has passed since the game ball was placed at the guide position. Further, FIG. 2C-5 illustrates the position of the game ball at the timing 1.2 seconds after the slide member 17 is placed at the guide position. As is clear from the notations of FIGS. 2(C-2) to (C-5), when it is determined to operate the slide member 17 in the time saving game state, the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position. While the state continues for 1.92 seconds, the game ball that has fallen immediately after the slide member 17 is placed at the guide position reaches the second starting opening 12 after about 1.2 seconds.

Therefore, when it is determined that the slide member 17 is to be operated in the time saving game state, the player can easily make a game ball hit the second starting opening 12 by making a right hit. Is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the slide member 17 is to be operated when the game is controlled in the "normal game state", the slide member 17 is returned to the storage position after 0.036 seconds have passed since the slide member 17 was placed at the guide position. The operation is performed once. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 2(C-3), the game ball that has dropped onto the slide member 17 immediately after the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position has the slide member 17 arranged at the guide position. At the timing when 0.5 seconds have passed from the start, the slide member 17 reaches only the vicinity of the center. Therefore, when 0.036 seconds have passed since the slide member 17 was placed at the guide position and the slide member 17 returned to the storage position, the slide member immediately after the game ball dropped onto the slide member 17. It will fall from 17.

Therefore, when it is determined that the slide member 17 is operated when the game is controlled in the "normal game state", it is impossible to win the game ball to the second starting opening 12.

In the following description, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 16 will be referred to as “normal symbol determination”.

The ordinary winning opening 14 is always opened like the first starting opening 11, and is a winning opening through which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of winning balls are paid out by winning a game ball. Unlike the first starting opening 11 and the like, the determination is not made even if a game ball wins the normal winning opening 14.

The game balls that have passed over the slide member 191 of the small winning opening 19 are sorted by the game nail and the guide member. That is, the right-handed game ball can win the normal winning opening 14 provided in the right game area 10 in the process of flowing down as illustrated by the arrows 32, 33, 34 (see FIG. 1). Also, the game ball hit to the right wins the big winning opening 13 if the big winning opening 13 is opened in the process of flowing down as illustrated by the arrows 32, 33, 35 (see FIG. 1). If the special winning opening 13 is closed, it flows down as illustrated by the arrow 36 (see FIGS. 1 and 2B).

Note that the game ball flowing down as illustrated by the arrow 36 can enter the second starting opening 12 when the state in which the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position in the time saving game state continues for 1.92 seconds. On the other hand, at other times, the second starting opening 12 is not won, and the second starting opening 12 is discharged from the game area 10 through the discharging opening 18.
Moreover, the game ball that has flowed down as illustrated by the arrows 32, 33, and 34 (see FIG. 1) may go to the second starting opening 12 without winning the normal winning opening 14.

Since the right side area of the game area 10 and the area inside the small winning opening 19 are partitioned by an acrylic member or the like, the game ball that has passed over the slide member 191 enters the small winning opening 19. No matter what, the flow will flow down the right side region mainly as illustrated by the arrows 32 to 35.
Further, since the right side area and the area inside the special winning opening 13 are partitioned by an acrylic member or the like, the game ball that has passed over the slide member 38 (see FIG. 2B) is the big winning opening 13 It moves on the inclined member 62 (see FIG. 2B) without entering the inside.

[Configuration Example of Rendering Means of Gaming Machine 1]
As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 and the frame member 3 are used to perform various effects, and include a main liquid crystal display device 5, a sub liquid crystal display device 6, a performance accessory 7, a speaker 24, and a frame lamp 25 ( (See FIG. 4), a panel lamp 37 (see FIG. 4) and the like are provided.

The main liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 5 (hereinafter referred to as “liquid crystal screen 5”) is provided at a position where it is easily viewed by the player. .. On the liquid crystal screen 5, for example, a decorative pattern for informing the determination result of the special symbol determination, a character or an item for performing a notice effect, and a hold image (a hold icon that is displayed for the number of times the first special symbol determination is held) ), it is possible to display an effect image including various display objects such as the icon indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed. The image display device may be configured by another image display device such as an EL display device.

The sub liquid crystal display device 6 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and is arranged above the main liquid crystal display device 5 and on the front side of the gaming machine 1 with respect to the main liquid crystal display device 5. As the sub liquid crystal display device 6, a device having a smaller display screen than that of the main liquid crystal display device 5 is used, and is mainly used for suggestive effect suggesting the jackpot reliability. The sub liquid crystal display device 6 is configured to be able to descend to a position that covers the center of the liquid crystal screen 5, and for example, descends to the position during a predetermined suggestion effect that indicates that the jackpot reliability is high. ..

In the present embodiment, the case where the main liquid crystal display device 5 and the sub liquid crystal display device 6 are provided will be described, but the number of image display devices may be one, or may be three or more.

The speaker 24 outputs music, a voice, a sound effect, or the like so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 or asynchronously, and produces an effect by sound.

The performance accessory 7 is arranged in front of and on the side of the liquid crystal screen 5. A light emitting element (for example, an LED) is built in the performance accessory 7. The effect character 7 performs a predetermined effect by the movement of the character itself and/or the light. In the present embodiment, the director character 7 is configured in a shape imitating a star, is configured to be rotatable about the depth direction of the gaming machine 1 as an axial direction, and is located from the side of the liquid crystal screen 5 to the liquid crystal screen 5. It is configured to be movable to the front of.

Although not shown in the figure, the board lamp 25 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2, and the frame lamp 37 is built in the frame member 3. The panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 perform various effects by light, such as changing the lighting or blinking pattern and changing the emission color.

[Example of configuration of input means of gaming machine 1]
The frame member 3 is provided with an effect button 26 and an effect key 27 as input means for the player to make an input (see FIG. 1). The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information when the player presses it. The effect key 27 is a so-called cross key for the player to perform a selection operation and a cursor movement, and has an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key. In the gaming machine 1, there is a case where an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is performed.

[Configuration Example of Display 4]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display device 4 in FIG. The display 4 is mainly for displaying information regarding special symbol determination and normal symbol determination, and as shown in FIG. 3, a first special symbol display 41, a second special symbol display 42, a first special It is configured to have a symbol holding display 43, a second special symbol holding display 44, a normal symbol display 45, a normal symbol holding display 46, and a game state display 47.

The 1st special symbol display 41, when the 1st special symbol determination is performed, the variation of the symbol is displayed, and then the symbol showing the determination result of the 1st special symbol determination is stopped and displayed to determine the 1st special symbol determination. Notify the result. On the first special symbol display 41, as a symbol for notifying the determination result of the first special symbol determination, a jackpot symbol for notifying one type or a lost symbol is stopped and displayed.

The second special symbol display 42, when the second special symbol determination is performed, the variation of the symbol is displayed, and then the symbol showing the determination result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed to determine the second special symbol determination. Notify the result. On this second special symbol display 42, as a symbol for notifying the determination result of the second special symbol determination, a big hit symbol for notifying one kind per hit, a small hit symbol for notifying per kind, or a lost symbol stop display. To be done.

By the way, when a game ball is newly won in the first starting opening 11 during the variable display of the symbols relating to the special symbol determination or the big hit game (or the small hit game), the first special symbol determination triggered by this prize and Variable display of symbols cannot be executed immediately. Therefore, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first special symbol determination cannot be immediately executed even if the game ball wins the first starting opening 11, the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved. It is configured, the first special symbol reservation display 43, the number of reservations of the first special symbol determination thus held is displayed.

The same is true when a new game ball is won in the second starting opening 12 during the variable display of the symbols relating to the special symbol determination or during the big hitting game (or the small hitting game), and the first starting opening 12 is played. If the second special symbol determination cannot be executed immediately even if the ball wins, the right of the second special symbol determination is suspended, and the second special symbol suspension display 44 is thus suspended. The number of reserved special symbols is displayed.

When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by displaying the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the symbol showing the determination result of the normal symbol determination. In addition, for example, during the variable display of the symbol on the normal symbol display device 45, when the variable display of the symbol relating to the ordinary symbol determination and the ordinary symbol determination cannot be immediately executed even if the game ball passes through the gate 16, the ordinary symbol The right to judge is reserved. In the normal symbol hold display 46, the number of holding of the normal symbol determination thus held is displayed.

The gaming state display 47 displays the gaming state at the time when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. The round indicator 48, when the big hit symbol (or the small hit symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41 (or the second special symbol indicator 42), the opening pattern of the special winning opening 13 during the big hit game. (Or the opening pattern of the small winning opening 19 during the small hit game) is displayed.

In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 is called "special symbol", and the symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 45 is "normal symbol". Shall be called. Also, the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is called "first special symbol", the special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is called "second special symbol", and both are called. May be distinguished.

[Configuration of control device of gaming machine 1]
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1.
On the back surface side of the game board 2, in addition to a ball tank for storing game balls sent to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29, a control device for controlling the operation of the game machine 1 is provided. As illustrated in FIG. 4, the control device of the gaming machine 1 centralizes the effect based on the game control board 100 that controls the progress of the game such as various determinations and the transmission of commands, and the command received from the game control board 100. And a sound control board 140 that controls effects by images and sounds, a lamp control board 150 that controls effects by various lamps and movable bodies, and the like.
The configuration of the control device is not limited to this. For example, the effect control board 130, the image/audio control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 may be configured by one board.

[Configuration Example of Game Control Board 100]
The game control board 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, and a main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 performs various kinds of calculation processing related to the determination and the number of prize balls to be paid out, based on a program stored in the main ROM 102. The main RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 101 executes the program or a work area for data processing.

On the game control board 100, a first starting opening switch 111, a second starting opening switch 112, a slide member control section 113, a gate switch 114, a special winning opening switch 115, a special winning opening control section 116, a normal winning opening switch 117, The small winning opening switch 194, the small winning opening opening/closing unit 118, the V winning opening switch 198, the lost winning opening switch 197, the missing winning opening opening/closing unit 119, and the indicators 41 to 48 constituting the display 4 are connected. ..

The first start port switch 111 detects that a game ball has won in the first start port 11 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The second starting opening switch 112 detects that a game ball has won in the second starting opening 12, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The slide member control unit 113 controls the operation of the slide member 17 by actuating an electric solenoid connected to the slide member 17 in a drive-transmittable manner in response to a control signal from the game control board 100.

The gate switch 114 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The special winning opening switch 115 detects that a game ball has won in the special winning opening 13 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The special winning opening control unit 116 operates the electric solenoid driveably connected to the slide member 38 closing the special winning opening 13 in response to the control signal from the game control board 100, so that the big winning opening 13 is activated. Open and close. The normal winning opening switch 117 detects that the game ball has entered the normal winning opening 14, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100.

The small winning opening switch 194 detects that a game ball has won in the small winning opening 19 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The small winning opening opening/closing unit 118 opens/closes the small winning opening 19 by operating an electric solenoid driveably connected to the slide member 191 in response to a control signal from the game control board 100. The V winning opening switch 198 detects the entry into the V area and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The loss winning opening switch 197 detects that the game ball has entered the lost area, and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The losing winning opening opening/closing unit 119 opens and closes the losing winning opening switch 197 (missing area) by operating an electric solenoid driveably connected to the slide member 195.

When the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 receives a detection signal from the first starting opening switch 111, the second starting opening switch 112, the special winning opening switch 115, the normal winning opening switch 117, or the small winning opening switch 194. The payout control board (not shown) is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game balls are won, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on the information from the payout control board.

This payout control board is configured to have a drive motor and the like for sending out prize balls from the ball tank provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 to the dish 28.

The main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the first starting port switch 111 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Specifically, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number are acquired at the timing when the detection signal from the first starting port switch 111 is input.

The jackpot random number here is a random number for determining the jackpot or the loss. The jackpot symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether the production with reach or the production without reach is performed when it is determined that there is a loss. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern when the special symbol is variably displayed.

When the main CPU 101 acquires these random numbers, it first determines whether or not to execute the jackpot game based on whether or not the acquired jackpot random number matches a predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 102. judge. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (per one kind). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed (jackpot), the jackpot pattern random number obtained is based on which random number value of the predetermined random number values stored in the main ROM 102 matches. The type (see FIG. 6C) is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not executed, that is, when the game is lost, the reachable effect is performed based on whether the acquired reach random number matches a predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 102. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the reach-less effect is performed. Further, regardless of whether or not to carry out the jackpot game, based on which random number value the acquired variation pattern random number matches with that stored in the main ROM 102, the first when the first special symbol is variably displayed Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. As a result, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined.

The main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 112 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Specifically, at the timing when the detection signal from the second starting port switch 112 is input, a big hit random number, a big hit design random number, a small hit design random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are acquired.

The jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number here are as described above. On the other hand, the small hit symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of small hit when it is determined to be a small hit.

When the main CPU 101 acquires these random numbers, first, the jackpot game (or the small jackpot game) is played based on whether the obtained jackpot random number matches a predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 102. Determine whether to execute. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (per one kind) or a small hit (per two kinds). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed (jackpot), the jackpot pattern random number obtained is based on which random number value of the predetermined random number values stored in the main ROM 102 matches. The type (see FIG. 6C) is determined. Further, when it is determined to execute the small hit game (small hit), based on which random number value of the predetermined small random number value stored in the main ROM 102 matches the acquired small hit symbol random number, The type of small hit (see FIG. 6D) is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit game (or the small hit game) is not executed, that is, in the case of a loss, based on whether the obtained reach random number matches a predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 102, It is determined whether the production with reach or the production without reach is performed. In addition, regardless of whether or not to carry out the big hit game (or the small hit game), the second special symbol is changed based on which random number value stored in the main ROM 102 matches the acquired random pattern random number. The variation pattern of the second special symbol when displaying is determined. As a result, the variation time of the second special symbol will be determined.

In the present embodiment, a case of determining the type of the big hit and the type of the small hit by using two kinds of random numbers of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number will be described, but in other embodiments, one kind of Random numbers may be used to determine both the type of big hit and the type of small hit. Specifically, in the symbol determination table at the time of jackpot illustrated in FIG. 6C, for each jackpot random number, not only types of jackpots (three types shown in FIG. 6C) but also jackpots Types (3 types shown in FIG. 6D) are also associated. Then, the jackpot symbol random number acquired when the game ball wins the second starting opening 12 is based on which random number value defined in the symbol determination table at the time of jackpot matches the jackpot type or Determine the type of small hit.

When determining that it is a big hit, the main CPU 101 executes a big hit game of opening and closing the big winning opening 13 through the big winning opening control unit 116 based on the determination result of the kind of the big hit.
In addition, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is a small hit, based on the determination result of the type of the small hit, it executes the small hit game of opening and closing the small prize hole 19 via the small prize hole control unit 118. ..
In addition, when the detection signal from the V winning opening switch 198 is input during the small hit game, the main CPU 101 opens and closes the special winning opening 13 via the special winning opening control unit 116 following the small hit game. Play the game.

When the main CPU 101 executes the jackpot game according to the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination), based on the type of jackpot determined before the jackpot game start, the game after the jackpot game end Control the state.
On the other hand, the main CPU 101, when executing the small hit game according to the second special symbol determination, on the condition that the game ball has passed the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hit game, before the small hit game is started. Based on the determined type of small hit, the game state after the big hit game (played following the small hit game) is controlled. That is, when the jackpot game is over, the gaming state is set to the "time saving gaming state". In addition, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hit game, the big hit game is not executed, and the above-mentioned game state performed when the big hit game ends is the "time saving game state". Since the process of setting to "is not performed, the game is controlled in the "normal game state" at the end of the small hit game.

Further, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input, and uses the acquired random number to execute the normal symbol determination. When it is determined that the slide member 17 should be operated, the slide member 17 is operated via the slide member control unit 113.

Further, the main CPU 101 causes each of the display devices 41 to 48 constituting the display device 4 to execute the process described above with reference to FIG.

[Configuration Example of Performance Control Board 130]
The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 131, a sub ROM 132, a sub RAM 133, and an RTC (real time clock) 134. The sub CPU 131 performs arithmetic processing for controlling the effect based on the program stored in the sub ROM 132. The sub RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub CPU 131 executes the program or a work area for data processing. The RTC 134 measures the current date and time (date and time).

The sub CPU 131 sets the effect content (effect pattern) based on the special symbol determination, the normal symbol determination, the big hit game, the small hit game, etc. transmitted from the game control board 100. At that time, the input of operation information from the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 may be accepted, and the effect content according to the operation information may be set. The sub CPU 131 transmits a command instructing the execution of the effect of the set effect content to the audiovisual control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

[Configuration Example of Image Acoustic Control Board 140]
The image/sound control board 140 is configured to include a general CPU 141, a control ROM 142, a control RAM 143, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144, an acoustic DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 145, and the like. Based on the program stored in the control ROM 142, the overall CPU 141 performs a calculation process when controlling an image or a sound expressing an effect whose effect content is set on the effect control board 130. The control RAM 143 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the centralized CPU 141 executes the program or a work area for data processing.

The VDP 144 generates an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6. The acoustic DSP 145 generates acoustic data output from the speaker 24. The overall CPU 141 generates a control signal based on the command from the effect control board 130 and the program stored in the control ROM 142, and outputs the control signal to the VDP 144 and the acoustic DSP 145, thereby the VDP 144 and the acoustic DSP 145. Control movements.

Although not shown in the figure, the VDP 144 mainly stores an image ROM that stores material data necessary for generating an effect image, a drawing engine that executes an effect image drawing process, and an effect image drawn by the drawing engine. It has an output circuit for outputting to the liquid crystal display device 5 (or the sub liquid crystal display device 6). The drawing engine draws the effect image in the frame buffer using the material data stored in the image ROM based on the control signal from the overall CPU 141. The output circuit outputs the effect image drawn in the frame buffer to the main liquid crystal display device 5 (or the sub liquid crystal display device 6) at a predetermined timing.

Although not shown in the figure, the acoustic DSP 145 is used as an acoustic ROM for storing various acoustic data relating to musical effects, voices, and sound effects such as sound effects, and as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP 145. SDRAM is connected. The acoustic DSP 145 reads the acoustic data corresponding to the control signal from the overall CPU 141 from the acoustic ROM to the SDRAM, performs data processing, and outputs the acoustic data after data processing to the speaker 24.

[Configuration Example of Lamp Control Board 150]
The lamp control board 150 includes a lamp CPU 151, a lamp ROM 152, and a lamp RAM 153. The lamp CPU 151 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the operations of the performance accessory 7, the board lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the like, based on the programs stored in the lamp ROM 152. The lamp RAM 153 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the lamp CPU 151 executes the program or a work area for data processing.

Light emission pattern data and operation pattern data are stored in the lamp ROM 152. Here, the light emission pattern data is data indicating respective light emission patterns of the light emitting elements included in the performance accessory 7, the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the like. The operation pattern data is data indicating an operation pattern of the performance accessory 7, the sub liquid crystal display device 6, and the like.

The lamp CPU 151 reads out, from the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152, the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 to the lamp RAM 153, and the light emitting element included in the effect accessory 7, the board lamp 25. , Controls the light emission of the frame lamp 37. Further, the lamp CPU 151 reads out, from the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152, the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 to the lamp RAM 153, and produces the effect accessory 7 or the sub liquid crystal display device 6. Control the drive of the motor that operates.

Further, when the player operates the effect button 26 or the effect key 27, the lamp CPU 151 transmits an operation command to the effect control board 130 to notify the effect.

[Explanation of change in game state and judgment result of special symbol judgment]
Next, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot and the game state. As illustrated in FIG. 5, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is controlled in the “normal gaming state” or the “time saving gaming state”.

The "normal game state" is a low base state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win the second starting opening 12. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the "normal game state", when the slide member 17 is operated, the ratio determined in the normal symbol determination is set to a predetermined ratio (for example, 256/256), and the variation time of the normal symbol is set. Is set to a relatively long time (for example, 8 seconds), and the operating time of the slide member 17 when it is determined to operate the slide member 17 is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.036 seconds). It

On the other hand, the "time saving game state" is a high base state in which a game ball easily wins in the second starting opening 12. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the "time saving game state", when the slide member 17 is operated, the rate determined in the ordinary symbol determination is set to a predetermined rate (for example, 256/256), and the variation time of the ordinary symbol is set. Is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the operating time of the slide member 17 when it is determined to operate the slide member 17 is a relatively long time (for example, 3.84 seconds=1). It is set to .92 seconds×2).

<Regarding variation pattern selection>
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the time saving number at which the second special symbol determination and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in the "time saving game state" after the jackpot game is set to one time, There are cases where it is set to 5 times and cases where it is set to 100 times, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol selected in the "time saving game state" has the following features.

(When the number of hours saved is set to 1)
When the time saving number is set to 1 time, as a variation pattern of the second special symbol of the time saving first rotation, the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively long (130 seconds in this embodiment). Selected. Then, when the maximum four accumulated special second symbol determination accumulated when the second special symbol is variably displayed in this variation pattern is exhausted, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, 2 The variation pattern of the special symbol is always selected with a relatively short variation time.
In this way, when the hold related to the second special symbol determination is exhausted, the variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively short is selected, but in the present embodiment, it is exhausted. If the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "miss", the variation pattern that the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected, and if it is "small hit", the second special symbol A variation pattern having a slightly longer variation time of 16 seconds is selected.

(When the number of hours saved is set to 5)
When the time saving number is set to 5 times, from the time saving first rotation to the time saving fourth rotation, a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time of the second special symbol is selected as a variation pattern of the second special symbol. Specifically, regarding the 1st to 4th rotations of the time reduction, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “miss”, and it is determined to perform the production without reach, the fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol A variation pattern with a time of 30 seconds is selected. In the present embodiment, when this 30-second fluctuation pattern is selected, the pseudo shortening fluctuation in which the decorative pattern is fluctuated for 2 seconds and then pseudo stopped for 0.5 seconds is repeated 10 times, and the reach effect is not lost. Notification production is performed.

The following is about the first reduction in working hours.
That is, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first time saving rotation is “big hit” or “small hit”, the variation pattern of the variation time of the second special symbol is, for example, 60 seconds or 35 seconds, Selected.
When the variation pattern of 60 seconds is selected, the reach is established in any one of the pseudo shortened variations that is repeated, and the hit notification production is performed in the reach production after the reach is established.
On the other hand, when the variation pattern of 35 seconds is selected, the immediate hit effect that makes it appear that a small hit (or a big hit) has occurred is performed without performing the pseudo shortening change. The immediate hit effect will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.
Further, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first time reduction of rotation is “miss”, and it is determined to perform the effect with reach, the variation time of the second special symbol is, for example, 60 seconds. A variation pattern is selected. When this 60-second variation pattern is selected, the reach is established in any one of the pseudo shortening variations that are repeated, and the loss notification production is performed in the reach production after the reach is established.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first reduction of the working time is “small hit” or “big hit”, the appearance rate of the immediate hit effect is too high, so that the immediate hit effect In order to suppress the deterioration of interest, the selection rate at which the fluctuation pattern of 35 seconds is selected is set to a value lower than the selection rate at which the fluctuation pattern of 60 seconds is selected.

In addition, here, for convenience of description, the case where the variation pattern of 60 seconds is selected when the reach effect is performed has been described as an example, but for example, when the variation pattern of 60 seconds is selected, the tenth variation is performed. Reach is established by the pseudo shortening variation and develops to reach production. When the variation pattern of 57 seconds is selected, the reach is established by the 9th pseudo shortening variation and reach production is developed, and the variation pattern of 54 seconds. When is selected, a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are actually prepared such that the reach is established by the eighth pseudo shortening fluctuation and the reach effect is developed.

The 2nd time reduction and the 4th rotation time reduction are the same as the 1st rotation time reduction, except that the variation pattern of 35 seconds in which the immediate hit effect is performed is not selected.

For the 5th speed reduction, as in the 1st speed reduction when the number of speed reductions is set to 1, the 130 second fluctuation pattern is always selected, and the second special symbol of the 1st speed reduction is variable displayed. The same effect as in the RUSH challenge battle that is held using the period is performed. This RUSH challenge battle will be described later in detail based on FIG.

(When the number of hours saved is set to 100 times)
On the other hand, when the number of time saving is set to 100 times, the variation pattern of the variation time of the second special symbol of 1.5 seconds is extremely short regardless of the determination result of the second special symbol determination.

Due to the configuration of the board of the game board 2, it is possible to win the left-handed game ball into the first starting port 11, while it is impossible to win the right-handed game ball to the first starting port 11. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the player hits the left with the aim of winning the game ball into the first starting opening 11. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the first starting port 11, the first special symbol determination is executed. Here, when it is determined that the jackpot (per type), the type of jackpot is determined. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, three types of big hits relating to the first special symbol determination are prepared: "7R hour-shortening 1 time big hit", "7R hour-shortening 5 times big hit", and "7R hour-shortening 100 times big hit". (See FIG. 6C).

When it becomes "7R time reduction 1 time big hit", big hit game including 7 long opening round games that long open the big winning opening 13 is executed, and after this big hit game ends, one second special symbol determination The game is controlled in the time saving game state until the variable display of the second special symbol related to is completed.
Until the 7R jackpot game is over, the game is controlled in the normal game state. Therefore, the right to the second special symbol determination is not withheld despite the player making a right hit during the jackpot game, and the right to the first special symbol determination is withheld at the end of the jackpot game. Then, the first special symbol determination and the variable display of the first special symbol will be performed. In this case, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is notified by using the three small symbols displayed in the small symbol display region 53 without displaying the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 50 (see FIG. 23). It

On the other hand, when the jackpot game is over, the game is controlled in the time saving game state, so that the player can easily win the game ball in the second starting opening 12 by making a right hit. .. Then, when the game ball wins the second starting opening 12, both the right related to the first special symbol determination and the right related to the second special symbol determination are suspended, the first special symbol The right related to the second special symbol judgment is given priority over the right related to the judgment.

If the game ball wins the second starting opening 12 after the jackpot game is over, a second special symbol determination is made to determine whether or not it is a small jackpot (or a jackpot), and a variation pattern of the second special symbol. The variation pattern selection process for selecting is performed, but here, the variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively long (for example, the variation pattern in which the variation time is 130 seconds) is always selected. Therefore, the time saving game state continues for a period (for example, 130 seconds) during which the second special symbol is variably displayed after the 7R jackpot game is over, and the player has the gate 16 and the second starting opening 12 By making a right-handed shot aiming at, it is possible to accumulate four rights for the second special symbol determination. For this reason, in the case of "7R hour reduction 1 time big hit", the second special symbol determination of 5 times (=1 time + 4 times) will be executed after the 7R big hit game is over.

When it becomes "7R time reduction 5 times jackpot", jackpot game including 7 long opening round games that long open the big winning opening 13 is executed, and after this jackpot game is finished, 5 times the second special symbol determination The game is controlled in the time saving game state until the variable display of the second special symbol related to is completed.
After the 7R jackpot game is over, five second special symbol determinations are made to determine whether or not they are small jackpots (or jackpots), but when the fifth special symbol determination is made for the fifth time, As in the case of the one time reduction described above, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively long may be selected. Therefore, the time saving game state will continue until the period (for example, 130 seconds) in which the second special symbol is variably displayed for the fifth time after the 7R jackpot game is over, ends, and the player operates the gate 16 and By making a right hit aiming at the second starting opening 12, it is possible to accumulate four rights for the second special symbol determination.
For this reason, in the case of "7R short working time 5 times big hit", the 9th (=5 times +4 times) second special symbol determination will be executed after the 7R big hit game is over.

On the other hand, when it comes to "7R hour reduction 100 times big hit", a big hit game including seven long-opening round games to open the big winning opening 13 long is executed, and after this big hit game is finished, 100 times of the second special. The time saving game state continues until the symbol determination is performed. In this way, when the time saving number is set to 100 times, the variation pattern of the second special symbol with a variation time of as short as 1.5 seconds is selected. And since the small hit probability related to the second special symbol determination is 1/7.5 (=40/300: see FIG. 6(B)), when the number of time saving is set to 100, a big hit There is a feature that a small hit is likely to occur in a short time after the game is over.

In this way, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment always shifts to the time saving game state, and five times (= Time saving 1 time + 4 hold), 9 times (= time saving 5 + 4 hold), or 100 times of the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is performed.
Here, even when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit", after the big hit game according to the big hit this time, the game will be controlled again in the time saving game state (Fig. 5).

By the way, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", the type of small hit is "4R hour short 5 times small hit" and "12R hour short 5 times small" illustrated in FIG. 6(D). It is determined to be either "win" or "small win for 100 times in 16R hours". That is, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", the number of time saving is set to 5 times or 100 times.
On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “big hit”, if the type of big hit is determined to be “7R time reduction once big hit” (see FIG. 6C), the time reduction is Since it is awarded only once, the player is disadvantaged compared to the case where the small hit is assigned, despite the fact that the big hit related to the second special symbol determination having a lower probability than the small hit of 1/300 is assigned. There is a possibility that it will become a problem.

Therefore, in another embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", the jackpot of one time saving may be selected, while the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit". In the case of a “big hit”, a configuration may be adopted in which the big hit of one hour reduction is not selected. Specifically, the symbol determination table illustrated in FIG. 6C is used as a symbol determination table dedicated to the first special symbol determination, and a second symbol is referred to by referring to a symbol determination table different from this symbol determination table. As an example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the type of jackpot relating to the symbol determination is determined to be one of "4R hour/short 5 times jackpot", "12R hour/short 5 times jackpot", and "16R hour/short 100 times jackpot". ..

On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit (per two kinds), a small hit game including an open game for opening the small winning opening 19 is performed. This open game is as described above with reference to FIG. 2, but when the game ball passes the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game of this small hit game, it becomes a V prize, and following the small hit game, it is a big hit game. Is executed, and after the jackpot game is over, the game is controlled again in the time saving game state (see FIG. 5).

In addition, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “big hit”, the big hit game using the special winning opening 13 is executed for all round games from the first round to the final round, and this big hit game ends. After that, the game is controlled again in the time saving game state (see FIG. 5).
On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", the small hit game is executed using the small winning opening 19. Here, when the game ball passes the V winning opening switch 198 and wins a V during the small hitting game, the big winning game is executed by using the special winning opening 13 to digest the second and subsequent round games. .. After the jackpot game is over, the game is controlled in the time saving game state (see FIG. 5). However, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hitting game (does not enter the V winnings), the round game after the second round is not performed, and after the small hitting game, The game is controlled in the normal game state (see FIG. 5).

In addition, even if the second special symbol determination of the set time saving number is performed, even if the result of the second special symbol determination is not a small hit or a big hit, the game state shifts from the time saving game state to the normal game state. Will be done. Also, when the total number of times the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination performed in the time saving game state reaches the specified number of times, the game state will shift from the time saving game state to the normal game state. .. The ending conditions relating to the time saving game state will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

[Explanation of judgment method using random numbers]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the determination using the random number, which is executed by the main CPU 101 (see FIG. 14) of the game control board 100, will be described. Here, FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM 102 and used for special symbol determination. Note that, in FIG. 6, for convenience of description, the case where the range of each random number is considerably smaller than the actual range and each random number stored in the main ROM 102 is stored as a continuous value will be described as an example. ..

FIG. 6(A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table used for the first special symbol determination. The jackpot random number shown in FIG. 6(A) is a random number used for the first special symbol determination executed when the game ball wins the first starting opening 11. In the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot random numbers is “0” to “299”, whereas one random number value “0” is stored as the jackpot winning value, and 299 as the non-winning value. Random number values “1” to “299” are stored. Therefore, the probability that the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed in the normal gaming state will be a big hit is 1/300.

FIG. 6(B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table used for the second special symbol determination. The jackpot random number shown in FIG. 6(B) is a random number used for the second special symbol determination executed when the game ball wins the second starting opening 12. In the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot random numbers is “0” to “299”, whereas one random number value “0” is stored as the jackpot winning value, and the jackpot winning value is 40. Random number values “1” to “40” are stored, and 259 random number values “41” to “299” are stored as non-winning values. For this reason, the probability that the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed in the time saving game state is a big hit is 1/300, whereas the probability that a small hit is 1/7.5 (=40/ 300).

That is, in the case of the above "7R hour reduction 1 time big hit", a 1/7.5 small hit is allocated by any of the 5 times (=1 time + 4 times of holding) of the second special symbol determination. Therefore, the continuation rate of the time saving game state is about 51.1%.
In addition, in the case of the above "7R time reduction 5 times big hit", a 1/7.5 small hit is assigned by any of the 9th (= 5 times + 4 times of holding) second special symbol determinations. Since it is good enough, the continuation rate of the time saving game state will be even higher at about 72.4%.
In addition, in the case of "7R hourly 100 times big hit", it is sufficient to allocate a small hit of 1/7.5 in any of the 100 times of the second special symbol determinations, so the continuation rate of the time saving game state Will be even higher.

In addition, a probability setting switch that can be set to any of settings 1 to 6 is provided on the game control board 100, and the jackpot probability (probability of one kind of jackpot illustrated in FIG. 5) can be changed depending on the setting. Any configuration may be adopted. In this case, for example, if the setting 1 is set, the jackpot probability is 1/300, if the setting 2 is set, the jackpot probability is 1/290, when the setting 3 is set, the jackpot probability is 1/280, and when the setting 4 is set, the jackpot probability is set. An example is a configuration in which the probability is 1/270, the jackpot probability is 1/260 when set to setting 5, and the jackpot probability is 1/250 when set to setting 6.

However, although the probability per one type is changed depending on the setting, it is preferable not to change the probability per two types (that is, small hits). In this way, by not changing the probability per two types, it is possible to suppress a change in the continuation rate of the time saving game state when the setting related to the probability per one type is changed. It is possible to prevent a large change in performance.

FIG. 6C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the symbol determination table that is referred to when determining the type of the big hit when the determination result of the special symbol determination is the big hit.

If the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, or if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number. To be done. The types of jackpots are the three types of "7R hour-shortening 1-time jackpot", "7R hour-shortening 5 times jackpot", and "7R hour-shortening 100 times jackpot".

In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 6C, in the symbol determination table at the time of jackpot, the range of possible jackpot symbol random numbers is 100 from “0” to “99”, Eighty-five random number values of "0" to "84" are associated with "7R hourly short-time big hit", and 14 random numbers of "85" to "98" are associated with "7R time-shortened big hit". Numerical values are associated with each other, and one random number value of "99" is associated with "7R 100 times reduction big hit".
Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is a big hit, it is determined to be "7R hour reduction one big hit" at a rate of 85/100 (=85%), The ratio of 14/100 (=14%) is determined as the "7R hour-short 5 times big hit", and the ratio of 1/100 (=1%) is determined as the "7R hour-short 100 times big hit".

FIG. 6(D) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the symbol determination table that is referred to when determining the type of the small hit when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is the small hit.

When the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit, the type of small hit is determined based on the small hit random number obtained together with the big hit random number and the like. There are three types of small hits: "4R hour-short 5 times small hit", "12R hour-short 5 times small hit", and "16R hour-short 100 times small hit".

When it becomes "4R short time 5 times small hit", the small hit game including the opening game which opens the small winning opening 19 is executed, and when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 during this opening game, the small winning game is started. Subsequently, a jackpot game including three long-opening round games (=four times-one opening game) in which the special winning opening 13 is long-opened (round games from the second round to the final round) is executed. Then, after this jackpot game is executed, the game is controlled in the time saving game state until the variable display of the second special symbol related to the second special symbol determination of five times ends.

When it becomes "12R hourly short 5 times small hit", the number of long open round games of the big hit game that is executed following the small hit game is 11 times (=12 times-1 opening game) instead of 3 times. It is the same as in the case of "4R hourly short 5 times small hit" except that.

In addition, in the case of these "4R short time 5 times small hit" and "12R time short 5 times small hit", as the variation pattern of the second special symbol related to the 5th second special symbol determination, the second special symbol Since the variation time is relatively long (for example, 130 seconds), the variation pattern is selected, and while the variation display of the second special symbol for the fifth time is being performed, the right of the second special symbol determination is up to four. It is possible to store.

On the other hand, when "16R hour reduction 100 times small hit", a small hit game including an open game for opening the small prize hole 19 is executed, and when the game ball passes through the V prize hole switch 198 during this open game, the small hit Subsequent to the game, a jackpot game including 15 long opening games (=16 times-one opening game) that opens the special winning opening 13 for a long time (2 round to round final game) is executed. Then, after this jackpot game is executed, the game is controlled in the time saving game state until the second special symbol determination is executed 100 times.

In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 6(D), in the symbol determination table at the time of small hit, the range of possible small hit random numbers is 100 from “0” to “99”. Then, 35 random number values of “0” to “34” are associated with “4R time reduction 5 times small hit”, and “35” to “89” corresponding to “12R time reduction 5 times small hit”. 55 random number values are associated with each other, and 10 random number values “90” to “99” are associated with “16R hourly 100 small wins”.
Therefore, when the second determination result is a small hit, the ratio of 35/100 (=35%) is determined as "4R time reduction 5 times small hit", and the ratio of 55/100 (=55%). The rate is determined as "12R hour-short 5 times big hit", and the rate of 10/100 (=10%) is determined as "16R hour-short 100 small wins".

In addition, when the slide member 17 is operated in the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, the loss probability, the probability that various kinds of big hits are selected, the probability that various kinds of small hits are selected, and the ordinary symbol determination shown in the above description. It goes without saying that the probability of being determined, the variation time of the normal symbol, the operation time of the slide member 17 and the like are merely examples and may be other numerical values.

[Screen configuration example of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the normal gaming state]
FIG. 7 is a screen diagram illustrating the screen configuration of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the normal game state. When the game is controlled in the normal game state described above, as illustrated in FIG. 7, on the liquid crystal screen 5, a decorative symbol display area 50, a hold icon display area 51, the area 52, and a small symbol display area. 53 is formed.

In addition, during the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 or the small symbol displayed in the small symbol display area 53 does not completely stand still but shakes on the spot. There may be slight movements. On the other hand, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol and the small symbol are also completely stationary. Therefore, in the following description, the state in which the decorative pattern or the small pattern is completely stationary is called "main stop", and the state that the decorative pattern or the small pattern is not completely stationary but continues to move slightly on the spot is "pseudo-stop". The term "stop" is used to clearly distinguish the two.

<Regarding decorative pattern display area 50 and decorative pattern>
The decorative symbol display area 50 is a display area in which a decorative symbol for notifying the determination result of the special symbol determination is displayed. In the state where the special symbol is stopped, in the decorative symbol display area 50, for example, a part of the symbol string of the decorative symbol consisting of a number sequence in which the numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction from the bottom to the top. Are actually stopped so that three of them are arranged side by side (see, for example, FIG. 9A). In this situation, for example, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 11, the first special symbol determination is executed, and accordingly, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol are started (for example, See FIG. 9B). Then, when it comes to the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination, and the first special symbol for notifying the determination result of the first special symbol determination With the stop display, the above three decorative symbols are stopped.

The decorative pattern has the following features.
That is, in the decorative symbol, a predetermined time before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is pseudo-stopped in a manner of notifying the determination result of the special symbol determination, and the special symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed. There is a feature that the main stop is performed in a manner of notifying the determination result.

Further, the decorative symbol has a feature that it may be in a non-display state during the variable display of the special symbol, for example, during SPSP reach or story reach described later.

In addition, the decorative symbol is basically stopped after being pseudo-stopped in a mode showing the determination result of the special symbol determination, but as an exception, it may be stopped without pseudo-stop. Specifically, when the number of times saved after the jackpot game is set to 100 times, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1.5 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. While the second special symbol is variably displayed for 1.5 seconds, the scroll display of each symbol row is continued without the decorative symbol being pseudo stopped.

Further, during the variable display of the second special symbol of the first rotation when the number of time reductions is set to one, it is not displayed after the reach of the decorative symbol (FIGS. 27(B) to (G), FIG. 28). (See (A)), when the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first rotation is "small hit", the small hit is displayed again (see FIG. 28(C)). On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first rotation is “miss”, the decorative symbol remains hidden even after the variable display of the second special symbol ends from the reach establishment. Then, with the stop display of the second special symbol, the determination result of the second special symbol determination is informed by the three small symbols (see FIGS. 28(A), (E), and (F)). This also applies to the variable display of the second special symbol on the fifth rotation when the number of hours saved is set to one.

Further, when the suspension of the second special symbol determination accumulated during the variable display of the second special symbol of the above time saving 1 rotation is exhausted, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “miss”, During the variable display of the second special symbol, and until the fixed time has elapsed from the stop of the second special symbol, the decorative symbol is not displayed (FIG. 28(G) to (H), FIG. 29(A) to ( See F)). On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", before the variable display of the second special symbol is finished, the three decorative symbols of the mode of notifying that it is a small hit The variable display is started, and the three special symbols are stopped as the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 25(B), 30(G) and (H)). In some cases, after the variable display of the three decorative symbols is started and before the three decorative symbols are stopped, the symbol promotion effect using the decorative symbols may be performed.
In addition, these things are the same when the number of times saved is set to 5 times, when the suspension of the second special symbol determination accumulated during the variable display of the second special symbols at the fifth hour reduction is exhausted. Is.

In the following description, the effect that is performed using the decorative symbol display area 50 including the variable display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as “variable effect”. The decorative design displayed in the left column of the three design columns is called "left design", the decorative design displayed in the middle column is called "middle design", and the decorative design displayed in the right column is "right". Sometimes referred to as "design".

<Small symbol display area 53 and small symbols>
The small symbol display area 53 is a display area in which three small symbols indicating whether the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is being variably displayed are displayed, and the decoration in which the decorative symbol is displayed is displayed. It is a display area smaller than the symbol display area 50. In the small symbol display area 53, the variable display of three small symbols of the left small symbol, the medium small symbol, and the right small symbol is started along with the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol (for example, the figure 10 (A) and (B)). Then, as the special symbol and the decorative symbol are stopped, the three small symbols are stopped in a mode showing the determination result of the special symbol determination (for example, see FIG. 12(F)).

The small design differs from the decorative design displayed in the decorative design display area 50 in the following points. That is, in the decorative design, a design sequence consisting of a number sequence in which the numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction from the bottom to the top is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 as a part of the design sequence. As described above, three columns are displayed in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, the small design is one in which three small designs of a left small design, a medium and small design, and a right small design are arranged side by side in a row, and each small design is arranged in the vertical direction of the liquid crystal screen 5. When viewed from above as the axial direction, by rotating counterclockwise, for example, each small figure is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 1, 2,. The number indicated by changes. That is, each small figure is different from the decorative pattern in that its display position is almost unchanged.

Regarding the decorative pattern, for example, the display area may be changed from the decorative pattern display area 50 due to the development of the reach effect (see, for example, FIGS. 10E and 10F), but each small pattern , Its display area is not changed from the small symbol display area 53.

Although not shown in the figure, each decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display area 50 is configured as a highly decorative pattern in which a character peculiar to the number is added to the number. On the other hand, the small design differs from the decorative design in that the small design is a design with low decorativeness composed of only numbers.

Further, the decorative design may be hidden during a predetermined period except when the variable display of the special design is started and ended (for example, refer to FIG. 11D). Further, as illustrated in FIGS. 28(E) to (H), FIGS. 29(A) to (F), and FIGS. Sometimes, it may not be displayed at all.
On the other hand, the small symbol is different from the decorative symbol in that it is not hidden during the variable display of the special symbol and the stop display of the special symbol.

In addition, in the full rotation effect that is performed using the decorative pattern, the three decoration patterns may be synchronized, and in the full rotation effect, the decorative patterns in each row such as “111”, “222”, and “333” are aligned. Each symbol row is scroll-displayed in the closed state.
On the other hand, the left small symbol, the medium small symbol, and the right small symbol have a characteristic that they do not synchronize with each other except during the full rotation effect. Specifically, when these three small symbols are rotating at high speed, each small symbol does not have the same number at the same time.

Further, in the normal game state, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "miss", when the reach effect is not performed during the variable display of the first special symbol, the decorative symbol is the first special symbol determination. After the pseudo stop in the mode showing the determination result of, the main stop is accompanied by the stop display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed from the start to the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the main symbols are stopped along with the stop display of the first special symbol. This also applies to the case where the reach effect is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol, but the reach effect has low jackpot reliability, for example, normal reach or SP reach.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "big hit", at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, with the decorative symbol being pseudo-stopped in a manner showing the big hit, Similarly, the three small symbols are also pseudo-stopped in a manner showing a big hit (see, for example, FIG. 9(F)).

Also, during the variable display of the first special symbol, if the reach production with high jackpot reliability such as SPSP reach or story reach is developed, the decorative symbol is hidden and the left small symbol of the three small symbols And the right small symbol pseudo stops in the reach mode, and only the small and medium symbols continue to rotate at high speed.

In addition, when the number of time saving is set to 100 times, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is extremely short with a variation time of 1.5 seconds, which is selected. For this reason, when the second special symbol is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed in the variation pattern of 1.5 seconds, the small symbol is pseudo-stopped during the variable display of the second special symbol, similarly to the decorative symbol. Instead, with the stop display of the second special symbol, the small symbol is permanently stopped.

In addition, when the number of times saved is set to 1 or 5 times, when the hold relating to the second special symbol determination accumulated during the final change in the hours saving game state is digested after shifting to the normal game state As the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a variation pattern of which the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than 1 second is selected. Therefore, when the second special symbol is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed in the variation pattern of this one second, the small symbol is not pseudo-stopped during the variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol is changed. Along with the stop display, the small symbols are actually stopped (see, for example, FIG. 25(C)). Then, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination that has been held is “miss”, the decorative symbol is not displayed between the variable display of the second special symbol and the stop display. (See FIGS. 28(G) to (H) and FIGS. 29(A) to (F)).

On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination that has been suspended is “small hit”, from the time the second special symbol is variably displayed until it is stopped, the second special symbol is displayed. After the decorative design (and the small design) showing the determination result of the determination is pseudo stopped, the decorative design (and the small design) is permanently stopped with the stop display of the second special design (FIG. 25(B)). Final fluctuation of FIG. 30 (G) to (H)).

The decorative design and the small design have the following common points.
That is, when the numbers shown by the small designs and the numbers shown by the decorative designs are the same, there is a feature that the colors of these small designs and the decorative designs are also common. For example, when one design displayed in the decorative design display area 50 is light blue, the next two designs displayed are blue, and the next three designs displayed are purple, each small The symbol is displayed in light blue when the small symbol indicates 1, is displayed in blue when the small symbol indicates 2, and is displayed in purple when the small symbol indicates 3. Therefore, each small symbol (the left small symbol, the medium small symbol, and the right small symbol) changes its color every time the number shown by rotation is switched.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 7, when the player hits left and the game ball wins the first starting opening 11 while the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, the acquired information acquired in accordance with the winning. The first special symbol determination is executed based on (big hit random numbers, etc.), and the first special symbol is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination. On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the following effects are performed.

That is, first, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is started. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started so that the three symbol columns composed of the plurality of decorative symbols scroll from the top to the bottom, Three small symbols start high-speed rotation (see, for example, FIGS. 10A and 10B). In the following description, the effect that is performed using the decorative symbol display area 50 including the variable display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as “variable effect”.

Then, after a predetermined time has passed from the start of scrolling, before all the decorative symbols are completely stopped, for example, the left symbol, which is the decorative symbol in the left column, is pseudo-stopped, and the right symbol, which is the decorative symbol in the right column. Also stops pseudo. In this way, when the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo stopped, if these decorative symbols are not the same symbol, the reach is not established, and the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “miss”. There are three decorative symbols (for example, the "254" pattern) that informs that there is a pseudo stop on the activated line, and the pseudo stop is accompanied by the stop display of the first special symbol indicating "miss". The three decorative patterns are stopped. In this case, the three small symbols continue high-speed rotation during the variable display of the first special symbol, and show the same result as the three decorative symbols with the stop display of the first special symbol indicating "miss". In the mode, the book is stopped at the same time as the three decorative patterns.

In addition, when the reach-free effect is performed in this way, the three small symbols basically continue to rotate at high speed during the variable display of the first special symbol without pseudo stop (for example, FIG. 9B). (See (C) and), with the stop display of the first special symbol, the main stop is performed so as to show the same result as the three decorative symbols (see, for example, FIG. 12(H)).
However, during SPSP reach or story reach, which will be described later, there is a period during which the decorative symbols are not displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and during this period, three small symbols are pseudo-stopped in the reach mode (for example, FIG. 11(D )reference).

In the decorative symbol display area 50, when the same decorative symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol stops pseudo, the reach is established (for example, see FIG. 10(C)). When the reach is established in this way, a reach production that gives the player the expectation that the same decorative design as the reach design (left design and right design) will stop in the middle row as the middle design and become the design alignment. Is done. When the reach is established, the three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed (see, for example, FIG. 9(C)). When the reach reaches SP or reach, the three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed. , SPSP Reaching and developing to story reach, the three small symbols are pseudo-stopped in the reach mode.

Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed when the variable display of the first special symbol is started is "miss", the reach effect on the liquid crystal screen 5 during the variable display of the first special symbol Is performed, three decorative symbols showing reach miss eyes (for example, "343") are pseudo-stopped to inform the user of the loss, and along with the stop display of the first special symbol, these three decorative symbols (and three small symbols) ) Will stop. On the other hand, when the reach effect is not performed, the three decorative symbols showing the above-mentioned variability are pseudo-stopped, and the main stop is accompanied by the stop display of the first special symbol. In this way, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not to be executed, a "miss notification effect" is executed in which the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating the loss and then stopped to notify the loss.

When this loss notification effect is executed, the jackpot game is not executed, and if the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved, the first special symbol determination and the variable display of the first special symbol are immediately started. It

On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", the reach effect is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol, and a mode showing a big hit (for example, Zoro such as "333" or "777"). Three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped with eyes), and the main stop is accompanied by the stop display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the three small symbols are pseudo-stopped in the same manner as the jackpot in synchronization with the three decorative symbols (see FIG. 9(F)), and with the stop display of the first special symbol, 3 The book stops with two decorative patterns. In this way, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed, the "hit notification effect" is executed in which the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner showing the jackpot and then stopped to notify the jackpot. When this hit notification effect is executed, a big hit game is executed.

<Hold icon display area 51>
The hold icon display area 51 is an area in which a hold icon indicating that the first special symbol determination is held is displayed. In the gaming machine 1, in the situation where the special symbol determination and the variable symbol display of the special symbol cannot be immediately started such as during the variable display of the special symbol or during the big hit game, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 11, the first special The right of symbol determination is reserved with a predetermined number (four in this embodiment) as an upper limit.

In this way, when the right of the first special symbol determination is suspended, the first suspension area 51 displays the same number of suspension icons as the number of suspensions of the first special symbol determination displayed by the first special symbol suspension display 43. To be done. FIG. 7 exemplifies a state in which four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 51 in order to suggest that the number of hold of the first special symbol determination is the maximum “4”. In addition, in FIG. 7, in order to easily understand the order in which the hold icons are displayed, a number is attached to each hold icon, but actually, a hold icon that does not include a number is displayed.

In addition, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the game ball does not basically win the second starting opening 12, and therefore, the right of the second special symbol determination is not reserved, The hold icon relating to the second special symbol determination is not displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the display area for displaying this hold icon is not formed. Further, when the game is controlled in the time saving game state, the right of the second special symbol determination is suspended, but the suspension icon corresponding to the suspension is not displayed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to distinguish between the hold icon related to the first special symbol determination and the hold icon related to the second special symbol determination, in the following description, the hold icon related to the first special symbol determination (holding icon display area 51 The hold icon displayed in (1) is simply called a "hold icon".

(Regarding change in display mode of hold icon)
By the way, in this embodiment, the hold icon is normally displayed as a white hold icon. On the other hand, when the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 51, an effect of changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the hold icon may be performed. When this effect is performed, the white hold icon changes to a hold icon of a color such as blue, green, red, or gold that indicates the jackpot reliability. The colors illustrated here are arranged in order from the one with the lowest jackpot reliability. Gold and red are easy to be selected in the case of a big hit, but are difficult to be selected in the case of losing, and are easily selected in the case where the variation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively long time. Green is easy to be selected when it is a "big hit" or when it is "missing" but the variation time of the special symbol is set to a medium time. Blue is easy to be selected in the case of “miss” or “miss” and when the variation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively short time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case where the icon of gold (see FIG. 16E) has a different display color and shape from the icon of another display color. In addition, here, the case where the display color of the hold icon changes once has been described as an example. However, for example, the white hold icon changes to a blue hold icon, and this blue hold icon later changes to a red hold icon. In some cases, an effect of changing the display color of one hold icon a plurality of times, such as changing, may be performed. In addition, here, the case where the display color of the hold icon, which was white when the display of the hold icon was started, was changed to another display color, the display color of the newly displayed hold icon was changed from the beginning. It may be another display color different from white, and an effect of changing the display color of the hold icon of this other display color may be performed.

Up to this point, the effect of changing the display color of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 51 has been described, but the same effect may be performed on the icon displayed in the area 52 described later. ..

In the present embodiment, the effect of changing the display mode of the icon (the hold icon or the icon) is an effect of changing the display color of the icon (for example, see FIGS. 14C to 14H), the display color of the icon, and the A case of an effect of changing the shape (see, for example, FIG. 15H and FIGS. 16A to 16E) will be described.
However, the effect of changing the display mode of the icon may be one that changes at least one of the display color, shape, and size of the hold icon (or the icon), such as the hold icon or the icon. May be the effect of changing only the size of, or the effect of changing the shape and size of the hold icon or the icon (without changing the display color).

<Regarding the area 52>
The icon display area 52 (hereinafter abbreviated as “area 52 ”) is an area for displaying the icon as a variation suggesting image that suggests that the first special symbol is variably displayed. The icon is displayed in the area 52 with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and is erased from the area 52 at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. The deletion timing of the icon is not limited to this, and the icon may be deleted during the variable display of the first special symbol. For example, it is possible to delete the icon when the SPSP reach is developed or the story reach is developed.

The first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 51 (hold icon including the number “1” closest to the area 52: see FIG. 7) is executed. Then, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the hold icon is shifted to the area 52 and displayed as the icon. At this time, if other hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 51, those hold icons are shifted in the hold icon display area 51 in the direction toward the area 52.

[Flow of production accompanying variable display of the first special symbol]
FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the reach effect. When the first special symbol determination by the main CPU 101 is executed, the first special symbol is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed in a mode showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination. On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, with the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 50 (see FIG. 7) is started (see FIG. 8A). The start of the variable display of the decorative pattern is as described above with reference to FIG.

If the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss, the reach is not established during the variable display of the first special symbol, and the three decorative symbols (for example, slashes) showing the loss in the decorative symbol display area 50 are simulated. After the stop, the winning notification effect may be performed in which the three decorative symbols are permanently stopped along with the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the loss (see FIG. 8B).

On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit and if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss (based on the reach random number), it is determined to perform reach production, While the variable display of one special symbol is displayed, the same left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped on the activated line to establish the reach (see FIG. 8C). Then, when the reach is established in this way, the predetermined decorative pattern that raises the player's expectation that the same decorative design as the reach design (left design and right design) is stopped on the effective line as the middle design and becomes the design alignment Reach production is performed.

In the present embodiment, as reach effects that can be executed with the variable display of the first special symbol, normal reach effects (hereinafter abbreviated as “normal reach”), SP reach effects (hereinafter abbreviated as “SP reach”), SPSP reach. There are four types of reach effects, that is, effect (hereinafter abbreviated as "SPSP reach") and story reach effect (hereinafter abbreviated as "story reach").

Normal reach (see FIG. 8D) is a reach effect in which the jackpot reliability is relatively low (for example, jackpot reliability: about 2%). When the reach is developed to a normal reach, the scroll speed of the middle row of symbols, which is scroll-displayed at high speed between the two reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol), gradually decreases. Here, at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively short (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation time is 15 seconds). When selected, the following variation effect is performed.

When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", the same decorative design as the reach design is pseudo-stopped on the effective line as the middle design, and then the same three decorative designs on the effective line (for example, "777"). Winning notification effect (see FIG. 8(B)) for permanently stopping the double eyes such as "." On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “miss”, a decorative design different from the reach design as a middle design is pseudo-stopped on the activated line, and then three decorative symbols on the activated line (for example, “787”). The winning notification effect (see FIG. 8B) for permanently stopping the reach lost eyes such as "."

On the other hand, when the variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long is selected, in the normal reach, the scroll display of the middle row of symbols is displayed even after the same decorative symbol as the reach symbol passes on the activated line. Continuing, the SP reach (see FIG. 8E) or SPSP reach (see FIG. 8F) is developed. In the present embodiment, these reach effects notify whether or not a jackpot is achieved by winning or losing a battle between a main character (hereinafter abbreviated as “hero character”) and an enemy character (hereinafter abbreviated as “enemy character”). It is configured as a reach production.

SP Reach and SPSP Reach are positioned such that SP Reach is the first half of the battle and SPSP Reach is the second half of the battle, and the enemy characters fighting are common in the first half of the battle and the second half of the battle. That is, for example, when the battle with the enemy character A is developed in the SP reach in the first half of the battle, the battle with the same enemy character A is also developed in the SP SP reach in the second half of the battle.

In addition, when SP reach and SPSP reach are compared, SPSP reach has higher jackpot reliability than SP reach, and compared with the case where the winning is notified at the end of SP reach, the winning at the end of SPSP reach When it is notified, the jackpot is notified more easily (it is easier to win the battle with the enemy character).

In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 8, when SPSP reach is performed, normal reach develops to SPSP reach via SP reach, and normal reach develops directly to SPSP reach without passing SP reach. In some cases

On the other hand, story reach (see FIG. 8(G)) is a production in which a specific story is developed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and whether or not the end of the story is a predetermined end is a big hit. It is configured. In the present embodiment, when the four types of reach effects are compared, the jackpot reliability of the story reach is highest, and there are cases where the normal reach directly develops to the story reach and cases where the SP reach reaches the story reach.

In the present embodiment, the case where there is one type of normal reach will be described. However, as the normal reach, it is possible to execute a short reach with a short production execution time and a long reach with a long production execution time compared to the short reach. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the reach can be developed into SP reach, SPSP reach, or story reach, while the short reach does not develop into these three types of reach production.

Further, the type of reach production and the way of developing the reach production illustrated in FIG. 8 are merely examples, and the type and the way of development of the reach production may be other.

[Relationship between decorative designs and small designs]
Next, the relationship between the decorative design and the small design will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 9 is a screen view for explaining the relationship between the decorative symbol and the small symbol.

As illustrated in FIG. 9A, since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, when the three decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display region 50 are permanently stopped, the small symbol display region 53 is displayed. The three small symbols displayed in 3 are stopped so as to show the same numbers as the above three decorative symbols. That is, for example, when the left symbol is 2 symbols, the middle symbol is 8 symbols, and the right symbol is 5 symbols, the left small symbol indicating 2 is a small symbol indicating 8, the right small symbol is 5 Is stopped (see FIG. 9A).

FIG. 9B illustrates the state immediately after the scroll display of the three symbol rows in the decorative symbol display area 50 is started. In this way, immediately after the scroll display of the three symbol rows is started, the scroll speed is high, and it is difficult to identify the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50. In this way, under the situation where the three symbol rows are scrolling at high speed, the three small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 rotate at high speed at a speed at which it is difficult to identify the numbers indicated by each small symbol. Therefore, the player can recognize that the first special symbol and the decorative symbol are being variably displayed based on the fact that the three small symbols are rotating at high speed.

In FIG. 9C, in the normal reach described above, as the reach symbol in the decorative symbol display area 50, the middle two symbol columns continue high-speed scrolling while the left two symbols and the right two symbols are pseudo stopped. The situation is illustrated. At this time, the three small symbols in the small symbol display area 53 continue to rotate at high speed.
Further, in FIG. 9(D), during the SP reach described above, the two left symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 are reduced and moved to the upper left, and the two right symbols are reduced and the upper right direction. It is illustrated that the reach symbols are moved to, and these reach symbols are pseudo-stopped in the display area after the movement. At this time, the three small symbols in the small symbol display area 53 continue to rotate at high speed.

Thus, when the reach symbol is displayed, the player can easily understand which decorative symbol the reach is established on the basis of the reach symbol, and the reach is determined by which symbol. It is not necessary to inform using a small design whether or not it holds. Therefore, during normal reach or SP reach, the three decorative symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 continue to rotate at the same high speed as before reaching the reach (see FIG. 9B) (FIG. 9). (See (C) and (D)).

On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 9E, during SPSP reach and story reach, reach production is performed using a wider display area of the liquid crystal screen 5 including an area in which reach patterns are displayed during SP reach. Since it is expanded, the period during which the decorative pattern is not displayed becomes very long. On the other hand, if the three small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 are rotated at high speed, the player may not be able to recognize whether or not the reach is established. For this reason, in the period in which the decorative design is not displayed during SPSP reach or story reach, the left is shown to show the same number as the reach design (for example, 2 designs) displayed before the development of these reach productions. While the small figure and the right small symbol stop pseudo, the small and medium symbols continue to rotate at high speed (see FIG. 9(E)).

In this way, since the left small symbol and the right small symbol indicate the same numbers as the reach symbol, the player has two small symbols even though the reach symbol (the left symbol and the right symbol) is not displayed. Based on, it is possible to easily specify in which reach pattern the reach is established. Also, since the small and medium-sized symbols continue to rotate at high speed, the player can easily recognize that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable display by seeing that the small and medium-sized symbols continue to rotate at high speed. it can.

In FIG. 9(F), the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, and in the final stage of the reach production of any one of the above-mentioned four types of reach production, in a mode showing a big hit (here, “222” It is illustrated that the three decorative symbols are displayed in a pseudo stop with double eyes. In this way, when the three decorative symbols are displayed in pseudo stop in the manner of showing the big hit, the three small symbols are displayed in pseudo stop so as to show the same number of these decorative symbols (FIG. 9(F)). reference).

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the case of “7R hour short, 1 time big hit”, even numbered double stitches are stopped as a decorative symbol, and in the case of “7R hour short, 5 times big hit”, other than 7 symbols as a decorative symbol. This is a combination of a type of jackpot and a decorative pattern that notifies the jackpot, such as stopping the odd-numbered double stitches and stopping the 7 doublet stitches as a decorative design in the case of "7R hour 100 times big hit". It is associated. Then, in the final stage of the reach production, after displaying the double-eyes of numbers that do not correspond to the actual big hit type as a pseudo stop, these double-eyes are changed in the state of changing to the double eyes corresponding to the actual big hit type. There is a case where a symbol promotion effect relating to a decorative symbol is performed after the stop and the main stop (see FIG. 9G).

Specifically, for example, the first moving display is displayed in which the doublet of “222” illustrated in FIG. 9F is reduced and the liquid crystal screen 5 is moved to the inner side (FIG. 9G). After this first movement display, a double-eye pattern (for example, “777”) having a number different from the double-eye pattern that has moved to the back side is moved so as to pop out from the back of the liquid crystal screen 5 to the front. 2 is displayed (see FIG. 9(H)).

Here, when the first movement display is being performed, three small symbols in the small symbol display area 53 may change because the doublets that have become smaller by moving to the back side of the liquid crystal screen 5 may change. Rotate at high speed (see FIG. 9(G)). That is, when the symbol promotion effect is performed, the three small symbols that are pseudo-stopped in the form showing the doublet start high-speed rotation again (see FIGS. 9F and 9G).

On the other hand, in the case where, for example, the doublet of “222” is changed to the doublet of “777” by the second movement display, the doublet after the change is not further changed and the main stop is continued. Become. For this reason, when the second movement display in which the changed doublet pops out at the end of the symbol promotion effect is performed, three small symbols are pseudo-stopped so as to show the same number as the changed doublet. (See FIG. 9(H)). Then, after three decorative symbols (here, double eyes) are pseudo-stopped after the second movement display is performed and then permanently stopped, three small symbols in the small symbol display area 53 (here, the same number) (Zoro's eyes), so that it will also be synchronized, stop after a pseudo stop.

In addition, in FIG. 9(G) and (H), a state in which a symbol promotion effect in which the even-numbered doublet is changed to the doublet of “777” is performed in order to notify the “7R 100-hour big hit” is illustrated. However, in the case of notifying the "7R hourly short 5 times big hit", the even-numbered doublet changes to an odd-numbered doublet other than 7 (for example, "333" or "555"), and in the small symbol display area 53. The three small symbols also change to the same odd-numbered doublet so as to synchronize with this change.

On the other hand, in the case of notifying "7R hourly short-time big hit", the first moving display and the second moving display in which the even-numbered doublet does not change to the odd-numbered doublet are performed. In this case, three small symbols (see FIG. 9(F)) that were pseudo-stopped in a mode showing even-numbered doublets (for example, “222”), after performing high-speed rotation once (see FIG. 9(G)) ), the pseudo stop is performed again in a mode showing the same even number of doublet (for example, “222”) as before the high speed rotation is started.

In addition, there is also a case where a design promotion effect is performed in which the decorative design is changed from the doublet pattern of the odd pattern other than the 7 pattern to the double pattern of the 7 pattern, but the flat pattern before the change is not the even pattern but an odd number other than the 7 pattern. Except for the point of being a symbol, the same symbol promotion effect as that described above with reference to FIGS.

<Specific example of a series of productions that develop into SPSP reach>
Next, a specific example of a series of effects that develop into SPSP reach will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 10 to 12 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of a series of effects that develop into SPSP reach through SP reach.

In FIG. 10(A), in order to inform that the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon in the region 52 is “miss”, the decorative symbol and the small symbol showing the same variability are stopped. The illustrated state is illustrated. If the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "miss", before the predetermined variation time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, it shows a variability (here "154") 3 The two decorative patterns stop quasi. At that time, the three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed. Then, when a predetermined variation time has elapsed since the variable display of the first special symbol has started, the three decorative symbols showing the broke are permanently stopped as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. Along with this, the three small symbols that have been rotating at high speed are finally stopped (without pseudo stop) in a mode showing the same variations (see FIG. 10A). It should be noted that FIG. 10A illustrates a state after the icon is erased from the area 52 with the end of the variable display of the first special symbol.

When a predetermined settling time (for example, 1 second) elapses after these decorative symbols and small symbols are suspended, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 51 is determined. To be executed. On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the hold icon whose display mode (for example, display color) is changed is displayed in the hold icon display area 51 as the earliest hold icon until the fixed time elapses. (See FIG. 10(A)), while the earliest hold icon is shifted to the area 52 and displayed as a new icon, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 50 and the small symbol display area 53 are displayed. The high-speed rotation of the small symbol in is started (see FIGS. 10A and 10B). As shown in FIG. 10B, with the shift of the earliest hold icon, the remaining hold icon (here, one white hold icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 51 is concerned. Shift toward the area 52.

Here, when the variable display pattern of the reachable effect is set by the sub CPU 131 when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, for example, after the left symbol is pseudo stopped, the same right symbol as the left symbol is set. The symbol is pseudo-stopped and the reach is established (see FIG. 10C). FIG. 10C exemplifies a state in which the reach is established with 6 symbols. In this way, when the same decorative pattern is pseudo-stopped in the left column and the right column as reach patterns, for example, a reach line connecting these two reach patterns is displayed in a superimposed manner on the reach pattern, and a voice such as "reach!" It is output from the speaker 24.

When the reach is established in this way, normal reach is performed to increase the player's expectation that the same decorative design as the reach design will be permanently stopped on the effective line connecting the two reach designs (see FIG. 10(D)). .. During this normal reach, three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed. When this normal reach is developed, the scroll speed of the middle row of symbol rows, which was scroll-displayed at high speed, gradually decreases (see FIGS. 10D and 10E).

Here, when the variable effect pattern that develops from normal reach to SP reach is set when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the following effect display is performed. That is, when the middle row of symbol rows is scroll-displayed, the same middle symbol (here, 6 symbols) as the reach symbol has passed the effective line (see FIG. 10(E)), but is not shown in the figure, The scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row is increased and high-speed scrolling is restarted, and it becomes difficult to identify the middle symbol displayed in the middle row. At that time, the reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 are reduced while keeping the reach state, and are respectively moved to the upper left area and the upper right area of the liquid crystal screen 5. It moves (see FIGS. 10E and 10F).

Next, a development suggestion production that suggests that the main character and the enemy character develop into a first-half battle is performed (see FIG. 10G). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10(G), the effect display in which the main character who battles with the enemy character appears from the left end of the liquid crystal screen 5 and moves to the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. Done.

Next, an enemy character will appear from the right end of the liquid crystal screen 5, and an enemy character appearance effect that moves to the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 will also be performed, and SP reach as the first half battle will be started. (See FIG. 10H).

When the enemy character appearance production is performed, a production display showing that the hero character encounters the enemy character and is surprised is displayed (see FIG. 11(A)), and subsequently, the hero character and the enemy character are attacked and defended. The offensive/defensive representation is performed (see FIG. 11B). Here, when the variation display of the first special symbol this time is started, the variation from the normal reach to the SP reach is developed, and in the case of the variation effect pattern for notifying the winning or losing is set in the SP reach, the first half An effect display showing how the win or loss is decided in the battle is displayed, and it will be informed at the end of the SP reach whether or not it is a big hit. Specifically, although not shown in the figure, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination this time is a big hit, after the effect display showing that the hero character defeats the enemy character is performed, The hit notification effect is performed in which the decorative pattern and the small pattern of the doublet are stopped after the pseudo stop. If the determination result of the first special symbol determination this time is a loss, the decorative symbol and the small symbol of the reach lost pattern are pseudo-stopped after the effect display showing that the main character is defeated by the enemy character is performed. After that, a loss notification effect is performed in which the book is stopped.

On the other hand, when the variation display of the first special symbol this time is started, the variation production pattern is set to develop from normal reach to SPSP reach via SP reach, and to notify the winning/losing at the SPSP reach. , The following effect display is performed. Specifically, in the final stage of SP reach (first half battle), as the development production that suggests that the battle between the main character and the enemy character cannot be settled and the battle proceeds to the second half, the production character 7 is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 It moves to a predetermined effect position in front, and the effect accessory 7 rotates while emitting light in a predetermined light emission pattern at the effect position (see FIG. 11C). Along with this, an effect display is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, showing how the effect accessory 7 radially emits light.

Then, after the production effector 7 is returned to the initial position and the production image is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 to display a solid white background image, the protagonist character and the enemy character face each other again and develop into the second half battle. An introduction effect of SPSP reach, which suggests to do so, is performed (see FIG. 11D). In this introduction, the character "VS enemy character A", which indicates that the battle with the enemy character A of the plurality of enemy characters will start, and the degree of expectation of victory of the main character for the enemy character A are expressed in the number of stars. The indicated victory expectation suggestion display is performed (see FIG. 11D).

In SPSP reach (the same applies to story reach), reach production is developed using a display area wider than that of normal reach or SP reach. Therefore, the hold icon display area 51 displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the hold icon displayed on the hold icon display area 51 are erased, and displayed on the upper left side and the upper right side of the liquid crystal screen 5. Reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are also erased from the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIGS. 11B and 11D). With the development of SPSP reach and story reach, in addition to the hold icon display area 51 and the hold icon, the area 52 and the icon displayed in the area 52 may be deleted from the liquid crystal screen 5. Good.

Then, along with this, since the player cannot grasp which decorative symbol the reach is established based on the reach symbol, the left small symbol and the right small symbol displayed in the small symbol display area 53, Pseudo stop is performed in a manner showing the same number as the reach pattern (see FIG. 11(D)).

In this way, when the SPSP reach as the second half battle is started, for example, an offensive/defensive production is performed in which the main character who is attacked by the enemy character drops his weapon (long sword) and is attacked. (See FIG. 11E). Then, by showing how the beam of light emitted from the weapon (ray gun) that the hero character changes to head toward the enemy character, a stirrup that enhances the player's expectation for winning the second half battle is performed. (See FIG. 11F).

Then, at the final stage of SPSP reach, the operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 11(G)). In this operation promotion effect, an effective period during which the operation of the effect button 26 is valid is set in advance, and, for example, a button image simulating the effect button 26 and “press!” which urges the player to operate the effect button 26. Characters and a validity period gauge showing the remaining time of the validity period are displayed.

On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 26 before the remaining time of the effective period becomes zero, or when the effect button 26 is not operated during the effective period and the end of the effective period is reached, If the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “miss”, an effect display showing that the hero character is counterattacked by the enemy character and the hero character is defeated without hitting the attack of the hero character is displayed, and reach loss eyes (eg, “676”). )), the decorative pattern and the small pattern are pseudo-stopped, and then the stop notification effect is made to be stopped.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, as a hit suggesting effect that suggests a big hit, an effect display showing that the attack of the hero character hits the enemy character and the enemy character is defeated is performed. (See FIG. 11(H)). At that time, the three small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 in the reach mode are pseudo-stopped in a mode showing a doublet (see FIGS. 11G and 11H). When this hit suggestion effect is performed, as the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the hit notification effect is performed in which the three decorative symbols indicating the double stitches are pseudo-stopped and then finally stopped (( (See FIG. 12).

If the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", based on FIG. 9(F) to (H), from the time when the decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating the doublet stop to the main stop The above-described symbol promotion effect is performed. FIG. 12A exemplifies a state in which the decorative design and the small design showing the double stitches of "666" are pseudo-stopped in the final stage of the SPSP reach.

When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the pseudo stop of these symbols is started, the symbol promotion effect is started. When the type of big hit related to the first special symbol determination this time is "7R hourly 100 times big hit", the first movement display that moves to the inner side of the liquid crystal screen 5 while the doublet of "666" becomes smaller (See FIG. 12B), and after this first movement display, the doublet of “777”, which is different from the doublet that moved to the back side, pops out from the back of the liquid crystal screen 5 to the front. The second movement display to move to is performed (see FIG. 12(C)), the decorative design and the small design showing the double stitches of "777" are pseudo-stopped, and the "7R hourly 100 times big hit" as the first special design. As the jackpot pattern that notifies that is stopped and displayed, these decorative symbols and small symbols are permanently stopped (see FIG. 12D).

On the other hand, when the type of jackpot according to the first special symbol determination this time is “7R hour-short 5 times jackpot”, following the first movement display illustrated in FIG. 12B, it moved to the back side. A second movement display is carried out in which odd-numbered doublet eyes (here, “333”) other than the even-numbered doublet pattern (here, “333”) are moved so as to pop out from the back of the liquid crystal screen 5 to the front (FIG. 12). (See (E)), the decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating the doublet of "333" are pseudo-stopped, and the jackpot symbol for notifying that it is "7R time reduction 5 times jackpot" is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. With this, these decorative symbols and small symbols are stopped (see FIG. 12(F)).

Further, when the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination this time is "7R hour reduction 1 time jackpot", following the first movement display illustrated in FIG. 12B, it moved to the back side. A second movement display is performed in which the even-numbered even-numbered eyes (here, “666”) are moved so as to pop out from the back of the liquid crystal screen 5 to the front (see FIG. 12G), As the decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating the doublet of “666” are pseudo-stopped, and the jackpot symbol for notifying that it is “7R time reduction one time big hit” is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, these symbols are displayed. The decorative design and the small design are stopped (see FIG. 12(H)).

[About icon change production]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as an effect using the hold icon (or the icon), a “hold icon change effect” that changes the display color of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 51 and a hold icon It is possible to execute "the icon change effect" in which the display color of the icon displayed with the start of the change of the first special symbol is changed.

In the gaming machine 1, after performing the hold icon change effect of changing the display color of the hold icon, the icon that changes the display color of the icon displayed with the start of the variation of the first special symbol related to the hold icon. The icon change effect may be performed in the first effect pattern in which the change effect is not performed.
Further, in the gaming machine 1, without performing the hold icon change effect of changing the display color of the hold icon, the display color of the icon displayed with the change start of the first special symbol relating to the hold icon is changed. The icon change effect may be performed in the second effect pattern for performing the icon change effect.
In addition, in the gaming machine 1, after performing the hold icon change effect of changing the display color of the hold icon, the display color of the icon displayed with the start of variation of the first special symbol relating to the hold icon is changed. The icon change effect may be performed in the third effect pattern for performing the icon change effect.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to realize these icon change effects, at the timing when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 11 and the first special symbol determination is suspended, the following pre-determination processing is performed. Is done.

<Preliminary judgment processing>
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 11 while the special symbols are being displayed in a variation in the normal gaming state, a predetermined number of first special symbol determination rights corresponding to the winning. Up to (four in this embodiment) can be reserved. In this way, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 11 and the right of the first special symbol determination is suspended, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the right to suspend is a jackpot, and this suspension is exhausted. When it is done, which variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol is executed at a timing when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 11 and a preliminary determination process is executed. The pre-determination process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

In this way, when the preliminary determination process related to the first special symbol determination that is suspended is executed, the suspension command including the preliminary determination information indicating the result of the preliminary determination process is transmitted to the effect control board 130.
On the other hand, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 executes, for example, the following process at the timing of receiving the hold icon related to the first special symbol determination. That is, for example, it is determined whether or not to execute the hold icon change effect based on the advance determination information included in the received hold command. When it is determined to execute the hold icon change effect, the effect pattern of the hold icon change effect is determined. Specifically, when executing the hold icon change effect, it is determined which display color of the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 51 (initial display color), and this hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 51. Finally, which display color to change while being displayed is determined. Then, the effect pattern for changing the display color of the hold icon from the initial display color to the final display color is also determined. Then, these determination results are set in the sub RAM 133 as setting information of the hold icon change effect, and an icon display command including this setting information is transmitted to the image acoustic control board 140, thereby realizing the hold icon change effect.

When executing the icon change effect in the third effect pattern, the sub CPU 131 is displayed along with the start of the variation of the first special symbol relating to the hold icon for which the hold icon change effect based on the setting information has been performed. When performing the icon change effect of changing the display color of the icon, the following process is also executed at the timing when the hold icon related to the first special symbol determination is received. Specifically, the sub CPU 131 determines the display color of the icon displayed in the area 52, based on the setting information related to the pending icon change effect. For example, when the hold icon is finally changed to the green hold icon while being displayed in the hold icon display area 51, the display color (initial display color) of the icon displayed in the area 52 is set to green. To decide. The final display color of the icon is determined based on the pre-determination information included in the received hold command, and the icon is displayed in any presentation pattern from the initial display color to the final display color. Also decide whether to change the display color of.
Then, the sub CPU 131 sets these determination results in the sub RAM 133 as the setting information of the icon change effect, and sends a variation effect start command including this setting information to the image and sound control board 140 to cause the icon change effect. To realize.

When executing the icon change effect with the second effect pattern, the sub CPU 131 executes the process related to the icon change effect without executing the process related to the hold icon change effect. Specifically, when the hold icon change effect using the hold icon is not executed, the white hold icon is shifted to the area 52 and displayed as the icon. Therefore, the sub CPU 131 determines the initial display color of the icon to be white. Then, based on the pre-determined information received in advance, the final display color of the icon is determined, and the display color of the icon is changed in any presentation pattern from the initial display color to the final display color. Is also decided.

In addition, the result of the preliminary judgment process (preliminary judgment information) performed at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 11 and the right of the first special symbol judgment is held, the held first special symbol judgment is The result of the jackpot determination process (see step S309 and FIG. 40 in FIG. 39) and the variation pattern selection process (see step S310 and FIG. 41 in FIG. 39) performed when the right of FIG.
Therefore, with respect to the icon change effect, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the effect pattern of the icon change effect based on the result of the jackpot determination process and the change pattern selection process. You may do so.

[Flow of the icon production]
Next, a flow of the icon effect performed using the icon will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 13 is an explanatory view illustrating the flow of the icon effect performed using the icon.

When it is determined by the sub CPU 131 that the icon change effect described above is performed, that is, when the display color of the icon is changed, the icon illustrated in FIG. 13 is used as the icon change effect. Any of the change success effect (refer to FIG. 13A), the icon change success effect (refer to FIG. 13E), and the upper icon change success effect (refer to FIG. 13F) are performed. In the present embodiment, these icon change success effects that change the display color of the icon are performed by throwing an item of a predetermined color possessed by an ally character (a character imitating a snowman) who is an ally of the main character. A case will be described in which the display color of the icon is changed to the same color as the hit item (production pattern) as an effect (see, for example, FIGS. 14C to 14H). ..

Note that, as the effect contents of the icon change effect, in addition to the above-mentioned ally character throwing an item to change the display color of the icon, the display color of the icon at a predetermined timing (for example, a timing of developing into SP reach). Are automatically prepared, and the display color of the icon is changed in response to the display of a character (or a pattern) indicating that the icon is changed. On the other hand, when performing the icon change success effect of FIG. 13A, for example, the sub CPU 131 determines which effect content to perform the icon change success effect corresponding to the icon used for the icon change success effect. When the variable display of the 1 special symbol is started, it is determined by, for example, a lottery using random numbers.
Further, there are also a plurality of execution timings of the icon change effect, and when the icon change effect is executed, the icon change effect is performed at at least one execution timing of the plurality of execution timings.

Note that FIG. 13 exemplifies a case where the icon change success effect of FIG. 13(A) is performed once during the variable display of the first special symbol once, but this icon change success effect is performed a plurality of times. You may be told. For example, when the initial display color of the icon is set to white and the final display color of the icon is set to red, the first icon change success in changing the display color of the icon from white to green The effect may be performed, and further, a second icon change success effect may be performed in which the display color of the icon is changed from green to red.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines in advance not to execute the icon change effect at the time of winning the first starting opening, when the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon is started, the first special symbol is displayed. Whether or not to perform an icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13(B)) that represents a failure to change the display color of the icon between the start and end of the variable display of the special symbol For example, it is determined by lottery using a random number, and the icon change failure effect is executed based on the determination result.

An icon change success effect that throws an item of a predetermined color possessed by an ally character to hit the icon and changes the display color of the icon to the same color as the hit item (see FIG. 13(A)) For, as an icon change failure effect, an item in which a friend character throws an item of a predetermined color but cannot hit the icon, and as a result, an effect in which the display color of the icon does not change is performed. (See FIG. 15A).

In this way, when the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13A) is not performed, the icon failure effect (refer to FIG. 13B) of the effect content corresponding to the icon change success effect is fixed at a fixed rate ( For example, 10%), it is possible to make the player expect that the icon change success effect will be performed even if the period in which the icon change success effect is not performed continues for a long time.

Regarding the display color of the icon, for example, it is conceivable to adopt the following multiple configurations. That is, the first configuration is a part of the case where the pre-determination result indicating that the variation pattern of the first special symbol that the reach effect is performed in the variation is selected at the start of the variation is obtained. The configuration is such that an icon change success effect that finally changes the display color of the icon to blue or more (blue, green, red, or gold) is executed.
In the second configuration, the reach effect finally develops in the change to SP reach or higher (SP reach, SPSP reach, or story reach), and the change pattern of the first special symbol is selected at the start of the change. In a part of the case where the pre-determination result indicating that is obtained, the icon change success effect that finally changes the display color of the icon to green or more (green, red, or gold) is executed.
The third configuration indicates that the variation pattern of the first special symbol that will reach the SPSP reach or higher (SPSP reach or story reach) will be finally selected at the start of the variation. In a part of the case where the determination result is obtained, the icon change success effect for finally changing the display color of the icon to red or more (red or gold) is executed.
In the fourth configuration, in a part of the case where the preliminary determination result indicating that the variation pattern of the first special symbol, which is to be produced without reach in the variation, is selected at the start of the variation, The configuration is such that an icon change failure effect that does not change the display color of the icon from white is executed.

By the way, when the above-mentioned first to fourth configurations are adopted, the following problems may occur. That is, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol for which the reach effect is performed is selected in about 10% when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss. As a result, about 90% of the lost games are produced without reach. Therefore, regarding the fourth configuration, if the icon change failure effect is performed at a rate of, for example, 15% when the reach-less effect is performed, the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13A) is difficult to perform. In this case, the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13(B)) frequently appears, and as a result, not only does the player feel uncomfortable, but the item hits the icon even if an ally character appears. On the other hand, the player may not have a sense of expectation and may significantly reduce the effect of the icon change success effect.

Therefore, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, the sub CPU 131 determines the effect pattern of the icon effect by performing the following processing. That is, the sub CPU 131 uses, for example, a random number when the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon is started in the case where it is previously determined at the time of the first start winning a prize to perform the icon change effect. According to the selected lottery, any one of the effect pattern A, the effect pattern B, and the effect pattern C is selected, and the icon change effect is performed with the selected effect pattern.

Here, the effect pattern A is the icon change effect that performs the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13A) between the start and the end of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon. Is a production pattern of.
The effect pattern B is an icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B) and a rewind suggestion effect (FIG. 13 (from FIG. 13 (from the start to the end of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon). C)) and a failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13D), and then an icon change success effect that is a success pattern of the icon change failure effect of FIG. 13B (see FIG. 13E). ) Is the effect pattern of the icon change effect.
The effect pattern C is an icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13(B)) and a rewind suggestion effect (FIG. 13( from the start to the end of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon). C)) and a failed rewind effect (see FIG. 13D), and thereafter, a high-order icon change success effect (FIG. 13F) which is a success pattern of the icon change failure effect of FIG. 13B. It is an effect pattern of the icon change effect.

Here, when the icon change success effect of FIG. 13(E) and the upper icon change success effect of FIG. 13(F) are compared, there are the following differences between them. Specifically, for example, after an icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B) in which a teammate character throws a blue item but cannot hit the icon (see FIG. 13B), an icon change success effect (FIG. 13). (See (E)), the same blue item used for the icon change failure effect is used as the icon change success effect, and the blue item is hit to the icon to cause the icon change success effect. An icon change success effect for changing the display color to blue is performed. This also applies to the case where the item used for the icon change failure effect is an item of another color (for example, green or red).

On the other hand, when the high-order icon change effect (see FIG. 13F) is performed after the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B), it is as follows. Specifically, for example, an icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B) in which a teammate character throws a blue item, but cannot hit the icon (see FIG. 13B), is followed by a higher icon change success effect (FIG. 13(F)), as an icon change success effect, an item of a color higher than that used in the icon change failure effect (here, for example, green, red, or gold) is used, The icon change success effect is performed in which the item of the higher color is hit with the icon and the display color of the icon is changed to the same color as the item. This also applies to the case where the item used for the icon change failure effect is an item of another color (for example, green or red).

As described above, the color of the item used for the high-order icon change effect (see FIG. 13F) is higher than the color of the item used for the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B). Therefore, for example, when the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B) using the gold item which is the highest color is performed, the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13E) is generated. While there is a case where it is carried out, there is a feature that the higher order icon change success effect (see FIG. 13F) is not carried out.

As is clear from the above description, the icon change success effect of FIG. 13E has the same color as the icon that could not be changed in the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B). While it is an effect that succeeds in changing the icon, the higher-level icon change successful effect in FIG. 13(F) cannot be changed in the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13(B)). The two are different in that the effect is a success in changing the icon to a color higher than the color of the icon.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the icon change failure effect (refer to FIG. 13B) as a so-called gaff effect is performed, the icon change success effect (refer to FIG. 13E) and the higher order. An icon change success effect (see FIG. 13(F)) may be performed. For this reason, the effect that the player's expectation for the change in the display color of the icon is significantly reduced due to the effect of the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B) is caused. Can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13E) that uses an item of the same color as that used in the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B), icon change failure An upper-level icon change success effect (see FIG. 13(F)) that uses an item of a color higher than that used in the effect (see FIG. 13B) can be executed. For this reason, it is possible to make the player feel unexpected, and a high effect is produced by the synergistic effect of the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13(B)) and the upper icon change success effect (see FIG. 13(F)). Can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13E) and the upper icon change success effect (see FIG. 13F) appear in the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B). It is configured as an effect in which an action performed by the teammate character (in the present embodiment, an action of throwing an item aiming at the icon) is redone, and as a result, the display color of the icon is changed successfully. Therefore, in order to effectively suggest that the above action is redone, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the icon change success effect of FIG. 13(E) or the upper icon change success effect of FIG. 13(F) is performed. Prior to this, a rewind effect (see FIG. 13C) and a failed rewind effect (see FIG. 13D) are performed.

Further, as is clear from the notation of FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, after the rewinding effect (see FIG. 13C) and the failure rewinding effect (see FIG. 13D) are performed, the icon change. A case where the success effect (see FIG. 13E) or the upper icon change success effect (see FIG. 13F) is always executed will be described.
On the other hand, in another embodiment, after the rewinding effect (see FIG. 13C) and the failed rewinding effect (see FIG. 13D) are performed, the icon change failure in FIG. 13B is failed. A configuration may be adopted in which an icon change failure effect that is the same as or similar to the effect is performed.
However, in this case, when the icon change failure effect is performed despite the rewinding effect (see FIG. 13C) and the failed rewinding effect (see FIG. 13D), the player In order to reduce the unpleasant sensation, an icon change success effect (FIG. 13(E)) is performed when a rewind effect (see FIG. 13C) and a failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13D) are performed. (Refer to FIG. 13F) or a high-order icon change success effect (see FIG. 13F) is easily performed and an icon change failure effect is difficult to be performed.

<Specific example of successful icon change production>
Next, a specific example of the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13A) will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 14 is a screen view showing a specific example of the icon change success effect.

In FIG. 14(A), in order to notify that the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon in the region 52 is “miss”, the decorative symbol and the small symbol showing the same variability are stopped. The illustrated state is illustrated. If the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "miss", before the predetermined variation time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, it shows a variability (here "154") 3 The two decorative patterns stop quasi. At that time, the three small symbols continue to rotate at high speed. Then, when a predetermined variation time has elapsed since the variable display of the first special symbol has started, the three decorative symbols showing the broke are permanently stopped as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. Along with this, the three small symbols that have been rotating at high speed are permanently stopped (without pseudo-stop) in a mode showing the same variations (see FIG. 14A). It should be noted that FIG. 14A illustrates a state after the icon is erased from the area 52 with the end of the variable display of the first special symbol.

When a predetermined settling time (for example, 1 second) elapses after these decorative symbols and small symbols are completely stopped, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 51 is made. To be executed. On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, a white hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 51 as the earliest hold icon until the fixed time elapses (see FIG. 14(A)). The earliest hold icon is shifted to the area 52 and displayed as a new icon, and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 50 and the high speed rotation of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 53 are displayed. It is started (see FIGS. 14A and 14B). As shown in FIG. 14B, with the shift of the earliest hold icon, the remaining hold icons (here, one white hold icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 51 are concerned. Shift toward the area 52.

Here, when the sub CPU 131 is set to execute the icon change success effect that changes the display color of the icon from white to green when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, as follows: A dramatic production is performed. That is, in the situation where the variable display of the decorative design and the high speed rotation of the small design are being performed, the ally character appearance effect in which the ally character having the green item appears at the right end of the liquid crystal screen 5 is performed (FIG. 14( See C)).

Subsequent to the ally character appearance effect of FIG. 14(C), an effect display showing how the ally character throws an item toward the icon is performed. Specifically, for example, an effect display in which a teammate character who possesses a green item jumps is displayed (see FIG. 14D), and then the teammate character who jumps aims at the icon from the highest reaching point and is green. An effect display showing how the item is thrown is displayed (see FIG. 14E).

Then, as the teammate character who was jumping descends, a performance display is displayed in which the thrown green item gradually moves toward the icon (FIG. 14(E)). ~ (G)), the green item finally hits the icon, and the icon changes so as to have the same display color as the hit item (see FIG. 14(H)).

It should be noted that, although the display color of the icon is changed to green here, since the second configuration is adopted, the reach is always established after the icon change success production is performed, and the final result is finally obtained. In addition, it will develop into SP reach, SPSP reach, or story reach.

In addition, here, the icon change success effect using a green item is described as an example, but the color of the item owned by the ally character is limited to green if it is a color higher than the display color of the icon. Instead, it may be blue, red, or gold. For example, when the green icon is displayed, the icon change success effect may be performed using a higher red item or a gold item, while a lower blue item is used. Icon change success production is not performed.

<Specific examples of rewind suggestion production and failed rewind production>
Next, specific examples of the rewind suggestion effect (see FIG. 13C) and the failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13D) will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a screen view showing specific examples of the rewind suggestion effect and the failure rewind effect.

FIG. 15A is a screen diagram illustrating an icon change failure effect, in which the green item thrown by the teammate character flies over the area 52, and as a result, the green item displayed in the area 52 is displayed. An example is shown in which the display color of the icon does not change. In the icon change failure effect, an effect common to the icon change success effect is performed until the middle thereof. Specifically, the production display until an ally character who possesses an item appears, the ally character jumps and throws the item, and the item flies toward the icon is the same as the icon change success production. (See FIGS. 14D to 14F). Then, in the case of the icon change failure effect, the item deviates from the trajectory toward the icon and falls into an area different from the area 52 (see FIG. 15A). That is, the icon change failure effect of the present embodiment is realized by performing the effect display of FIG. 15(A) after the effect display of FIGS. 14(D) to (F).

It should be noted that FIG. 15 shows a state in which a game ball is won in the first starting opening 11 during the icon change failure effect and a second hold icon is newly displayed in the hold icon display area 51. ..

Here, it is the sub CPU 131 that the display color of the icon is finally changed to gold and that the upper icon change success effect using the gold item is performed after the icon change failure effect using the green item. When it is set at the start of fluctuation, the following effect display is performed following the above icon change failure effect (see FIG. 15A). That is, while the ally character who has failed to hit the icon with the green item is displayed at the right end of the liquid crystal screen 5, another character appears at the left end of the liquid crystal screen 5 and says "again!". An effect display showing how to speak a dialogue is displayed (see FIG. 15(B)). This effect display is an effect that suggests that the icon change success effect for the icon is also performed after the icon change failure effect for the icon is performed. It can be said that it has a function as a rewind suggestive effect that suggests that it is returned.

Note that FIG. 15B exemplifies a situation in which the rewind suggestion production is realized by the production display showing that another character appears and utters the line "again!". In the embodiment of the present invention, for example, the rewind suggestion effect may be realized by performing an effect display that shows the time rewinding by rotating the long hand and the short hand of the clock counterclockwise. That is, as long as it can be suggested that the icon change failure effect is rewound, any effect content of the rewind suggestion effect may be used.

Next, following the rewind suggestion effect of FIG. 15B, a failure rewind effect of rewinding the icon change failure effect to the start point of the icon change failure effect is performed (see FIGS. 15C to 15G). ). Specifically, an effect display for reversely reproducing the icon change failure effect that is performed in the order of FIGS. 14D to 14F and FIG. 15A is performed. The speed at which the icon change failure effect is reversely reproduced is the speed at which the icon change failure effect is reproduced, that is, the series of effects of FIGS. 14(C) to (G) and FIG. 15(A) related to the icon change failure effect. It is the same as the speed at which the display is played. However, the speed at which the icon change failure effect is reversely reproduced may be faster than the speed at which the icon change failure effect is reproduced, or may be slower than the speed at which the icon change failure effect is reproduced.

As described above, in the unsuccessful rewinding effect, first, an effect display for returning to a state in which the item is arranged at the position immediately before it falls in an area different from the area 52 is displayed (see FIG. 15C). Next, along with an effect display showing that the ally character is returning to the highest reaching point, an effect display showing that the item is returning to a position close to the hand of the ally character located at the highest reaching point is displayed ( See FIGS. 15D to 15F). Then, an effect display showing that the teammate character who has caught the item descends to the position before the jump is performed (see FIGS. 15F to 15G).

By the way, if the effect image related to the failure rewind effect is displayed in the same color as the effect image related to the icon change failure effect that is the object of rewinding, the icon change failure effect and the rewind suggestion effect are sandwiched. There is a possibility that the player confuses the failure rewind effect that is mentioned, and the player cannot clearly recognize that the failure rewind effect is being performed. That is, it may not be possible to easily inform the player that the icon change failure effect has been rewound.

Therefore, for example, a configuration that clearly distinguishes the two effects by changing the display mode (size and shape of the effect image) of the effect image related to the failure rewind effect from the display mode of the effect image related to the icon change failure effect Can be applied.
However, when this configuration is applied, the relationship between the icon change failure effect and the failure rewind effect becomes weak, and the problem similar to the above may occur eventually.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the failure rewind effect is performed for the icon change failure effect, the size or shape of the effect image (allied character or item) related to the failure rewind effect is changed by the icon. The color of the effect image related to the failure rewind effect is set to be different from the effect image related to the icon change failure effect without changing the effect image related to the failure effect (allied character or item). Specifically, in the icon change failure effect, a white ally character and a green item are displayed, whereas in the failure rewind effect, a gray ally character and a gray item are displayed.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the failure rewinding effect of rewinding the icon change failure effect to the time before the icon change failure effect ends (in this embodiment, the icon change failure effect start time) Is done.

As is clear from the notations of FIGS. 15(C) to (G), even if the failed rewind effect is being executed, three small numbers are issued to notify that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. There is a feature that the symbols continue to rotate at high speed, and the variable display of the three small symbols is not rewound due to the failure rewinding effect.

Further, in FIG. 15(A), when the item thrown by the teammate character passes over the icon and falls to the area on the left side of the area 52, the first special symbol determination in the reserved icon display area 51 is performed. A state in which a second hold icon related to hold is newly displayed is illustrated. On the other hand, by the rewinding effect illustrated in FIGS. 15C to 15G, the effect is rewound before the teammate character throws the item, that is, before reaching the state of FIG. 15A. However, the hold icon display area 51 does not return to the state before the second hold icon is displayed.
As is clear from this, it can be said that the hold icon newly displayed during the icon change failure effect is not the target of the failure rewind effect.

<Specific example of high-level icon change success production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a specific example of the upper icon change success effect (see FIG. 13F) will be described. Here, FIG. 16 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the high-order icon change success effect.

After the failure rewinding effect is performed, the upper icon change success effect (see FIG. 13F) is performed in the following flow. Specifically, the color of the teammate character that has returned to the jumped position returns to white, and an effect display is displayed in which the possessed item (green item) changes to a higher item (for example, a gold item). (See FIG. 15H).

In the decorative symbol display area 50, the left 5 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle of the failed rewind effect (see FIG. 15C), and then the right 5 symbols are pseudo-stopped to reach the reach (FIG. 15(G) )), immediately after the reach is established, the upper icon change success effect is started.

Next, an effect display is displayed in which a teammate character who has replaced the item with a golden item jumps (see FIG. 16A), and then the teammate character who jumps aims for the icon from the highest reaching point and is a golden item. An effect display showing how to throw is shown (see FIGS. 16A and 16B).

Then, as the teammate character who was jumping descends, a production display is displayed in which the thrown golden item gradually moves closer to the icon (FIG. 16(B)). (See (D)), the gold item finally hits the icon, and the icon changes so as to have the same display color as the hit item (see FIG. 16E).

In addition, in FIG. 15(H) and FIG. 16, the gold item is shown in a mode different in size and shape from the green item, but these items are in the same mode in size and shape. It may be.

Further, here, the display color of the icon is changed to gold, but since the third configuration is adopted, after the icon change success production is performed, finally, SPSP reach or story. It will develop into reach.

FIGS. 16F and 16G exemplify a situation in which the normal reach develops and the SPSP reach introduction effect is performed.

In addition, after the failure rewind effect is performed, the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13C) is generated by using the item of the same color as that used in the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 13B). Although it may be performed, this icon change success effect is performed in the same manner as the upper icon change success effect except that the color of the item used and the color of the icon that changes when the item hits are different. .. Therefore, a detailed description of a specific example of the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13E) subsequent to the failure rewind effect will be omitted.

[Characteristics of unsuccessful rewinding production]
The main features of the failed rewind production are as follows.
That is, the unsuccessful rewinding effect is characterized in that the effect is performed using the area 52 and a relatively narrow display area that is a partial area of the decorative symbol display area 50.

Also, after the failure rewind effect is performed, as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot game is more likely to be executed than before the failure rewind effect is performed, before the failure rewind effect is performed An icon change success effect (see FIG. 13(E)) or a higher icon change success effect (see FIG. 13(F)) that changes the display color of the icon to the icon higher than the icon is performed.
Therefore, the player can recognize that the display color of the icon changes to a higher-level display color at the time when the failed rewind effect is performed, and the higher-order icon change succeeds than the icon change success effect. It is possible to enjoy the subsequent game while expecting the production.

Further, the present embodiment is characterized in that the speed at which the effect display related to the icon change failure effect is reproduced is the same as the speed at which the effect display related to the icon change failure effect is reversely reproduced in the failure rewind effect. ..

Further, during the icon change failure effect, the corresponding effect sound corresponding to the icon change failure effect is output from the speaker 24, whereas when the failure rewind effect targeting this icon change failure effect is performed. The characteristic effect is that, instead of outputting the effect sound that reversely reproduces the corresponding effect sound, a dedicated effect sound unique to the failure rewind effect is output.

When the unsuccessful rewinding effect is being performed, the effect display related to the unsuccessful rewinding effect is rewound, while the effect display related to other effects is not rewound. Specifically, although the reverse display effect display is performed for the teammate character or item used for the failure rewind effect, the decorative display and the effect display for reverse reproduction of the effect related to the decorative pattern are performed. There is no. Specifically, regarding the decorative design, when the failure rewinding effect is being performed, the left five designs are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 15C), and then the right five designs are pseudo-stopped to reach. The effect display which is materialized is performed (refer to FIGS. 15D to 15G), and it is clear that the symbol variable display using the decorative symbol is not rewound during the failure rewind effect. Further, as shown in FIGS. 15C to 15G, during the failure rewind effect, the three small symbols continue to rotate at a high speed in the counterclockwise direction, and the failure rewind effect produces three small symbols. The effect display in which the design rotates clockwise is not performed.

Further, when the number of hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 51 increases during the icon change failure effect (see FIG. 15A), until the start of this icon change effect (that is, before the hold icon increases). Even if the effect is rewound, the effect rewind effect does not cause an effect display such that the number of hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 51 decreases (FIGS. 15C to 15G). reference).

Although not shown in the figure, on the liquid crystal screen 5, for example, an effect display showing a state in which the main character and the teammate character are walking together is displayed as an effect for displaying the background image. Even if the failure rewind effect is performed while the effect display related to the background image is being performed, the effect display reverse to the effect display related to the background image such that the main character and the ally character return to their original positions. No replay takes place.

In addition, FIG. 15 exemplifies a situation in which the failed rewind effect is performed before the normal reach is performed, but the failed rewind effect is also performed at another timing, such as the timing when the normal reach is changed to the SP reach. It is possible. Then, even if the failure rewind effect is performed at the timing when the normal reach is changed to the SP reach, the effect display related to the reach development is advanced without being rewound. Here, the effect display relating to reach development is an effect display in which three small symbols are rotated counterclockwise at high speed, and as shown in FIGS. 9C and 9D, reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are displayed. The symbols are moved from the decorative symbol display area 50 to the upper left and the upper right while being reduced, and these reach symbols are pseudo-stopped in the display area after the movement.

[Modifications regarding icon change performance]
In the present embodiment, a case will be described as an example in which a failure rewinding effect that rewinds the effect to the start time of the icon change failure effect is performed, but in another embodiment, the icon change failure effect is in the middle (for example, Alternatively, a failure rewind effect may be performed to rewind until the teammate character throws the item). In this case, the icon change success effect may be started in the middle of the icon change failure effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the rewind suggestion effect (see FIG. 13C) is performed prior to the failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13D), but in other embodiments, the rewind is performed. The failure rewinding effect may be performed without performing the suggestion effect.

Further, instead of the teammate character, another object such as a tank or an airplane may be displayed, and bullets fired from these objects may be used as items. That is, regarding the icon change success effect, the icon change failure effect, and the failure rewind effect, these effects may be performed using an object different from the teammate character or item.

Also, in the situation where the failure rewinding effect (see FIG. 13D) is not performed, when the ally character A appears, the icon change success effect is always performed, while when the ally character B appears. It is also possible to adopt a configuration capable of executing both the icon change success effect and the icon change failure effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13D) is performed, the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13E) or the upper icon change success effect (FIG. 13F). However, in another embodiment, the upper icon change effect is always performed after the failure rewind effect is performed (the icon change success effect is not performed). A configuration may be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the icon change failure effect is not performed after the failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13D) is performed, but in another embodiment, the failure rewind effect is performed. In a part of the cases where it is performed, a configuration in which the icon change failure effect is performed after that may be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a failure rewinding effect is performed in which the effect display related to the icon change failure effect is reversely reproduced, but in another embodiment, the effect display related to the icon change failure effect is reversely reproduced. Instead, the icon change failure effect may be performed in which the effect is cueed to a predetermined time point of the icon change failure effect (for example, the start time point of the icon change failure effect). That is, a failure rewinding effect may be performed in which the effect display at the time of ending the icon change failure effect is directly switched to the effect display at the time of starting the icon change failure effect.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the speed at which the effect display related to the icon change failure effect is reproduced is the same as the speed at which the effect display related to the icon change failure effect is reversely reproduced in the failure rewind effect. However, these speeds may be different from each other. That is, the speed at which the effect display related to the icon change failure effect is reversely reproduced in the failure rewind effect may be faster or slower than the speed at which the effect display related to the icon change failure effect is reproduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the failed rewind effect, a dedicated effect sound for the failed rewind effect is output, but in another embodiment, a corresponding effect corresponding to the icon change failure effect during the failed rewind effect. You may make it the speaker 24 output the effect sound which reversely reproduces a sound.

[Flow of reach rewinding production for reach production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a flow of the reach rewinding effect, which is a rewinding effect performed for the reach effect, will be described. Here, FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the reach rewind effect.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed before the reach is established or after the reach is established. This pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol appears to be changed and displayed multiple times during one variable display of the special symbol, and the jackpot reliability is higher as the number of times the pseudo continuous effect is performed is increased. The configuration is adopted. Specifically, the pseudo continuous effect is performed once during the variable display of the special symbol, and the pseudo continuous effect is not performed when the effect finally develops up to the second pseudo continuous effect. The jackpot reliability is higher than in the case. In addition, when the pseudo continuous production is performed twice during the variable display of the special symbol once, and the production finally develops up to the pseudo third consecutive production, the production finally reaches the pseudo second consecutive production. The jackpot reliability is higher than when it develops.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a reach rewinding effect for rewinding a predetermined reach effect is performed as the above-mentioned pseudo-relational effect. The reach rewind effect having the function as the pseudo continuous effect is performed in the following flow. That is, first, a special symbol called a pseudo continuous symbol is displayed large in the center of the decorative symbol display area 50 (see FIGS. 17(A) and 18(D)).

After the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed, both the reach rewind effect (see FIG. 17B) and the reach reproduction effect (see FIG. 17D) described later are performed, so that the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed. It can be said that the effect has a function of suggesting execution of both the reach rewind effect and the reach reproduction effect.

Next, the reach rewind effect is performed following the display of the pseudo continuous symbols (see FIG. 17(B)). This reach rewinding effect is a rewinding effect targeting a plurality of effect images related to the reach effect, and in the present embodiment, a decorative pattern displayed during the reach effect, a character appearing during the reach effect, and the like. Reach rewind production is performed as a target. This reach rewind effect will be described later in detail based on FIG.

Subsequently, when the reach rewind effect is performed, the effect image (decorative pattern or character) relating to the reach effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 is removed, except for the small symbol displayed in the small symbol display area 53. In the state after the rewinding, the freeze effect of standing still for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) is performed (see FIGS. 17C, 19A and 19B).

Then, following the freeze effect, the reach reproduction effect of reproducing the effect image related to the reach effect from the time point after the rewinding is performed (see FIGS. 17D and 19C to 19E). When this reach reproduction effect is performed, it develops to a lower reach (for example, SP reach) (see FIG. 17E) or an upper reach (for example, SPSP reach or story reach) (FIG. 17( See F)).

<Specific examples of reach rewinding production and reach reproduction production>
Next, specific examples of the reach rewind effect and the reach reproduction effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 18 is a screen view showing a specific example of the reach rewind effect. FIG. 19 is a screen view showing a specific example of the reach reproduction effect performed after the reach rewind effect.

FIG. 18A exemplifies how normal reach is executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 52. Specifically, in the final stage of the normal reach, the scroll speed of the middle row of symbols is reduced in the state where the left 3 symbols and the right 3 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the decorative symbol display area 50 as reach symbols, and the same as the reach symbol. The state immediately after the middle pattern of numbers passes on the activated line is illustrated. Further, in this normal reach, the white icon is displayed in the area 52 (see FIG. 18A).

When the middle symbol of the same number as the reach symbol passes on the activated line, the scroll speed of the symbol column in the middle column increases and high-speed scrolling resumes, and it is difficult to identify the middle symbol displayed in the middle column. Become. At that time, the reach symbols (here, 3 symbols on the left and 3 symbols on the right) displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 are reduced while keeping the reach state, and the upper left area and the upper right area of the liquid crystal screen 5 are reduced. Each of the areas is moved to the area of, and a development suggestion effect is suggested to develop into a first half battle between the main character and the enemy character (see FIGS. 18B and 18C). In this development suggestion effect, as illustrated in FIGS. 18B and 18C, the main character who battles with the enemy character appears from the left end of the liquid crystal screen 5 and moves to the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. A performance display for searching for an enemy character is performed.

Note that FIG. 18B exemplifies a state in which the icon change effect in which the display color of the icon automatically changes from white to red at the timing of development from normal reach to SP reach is performed.

Here, when the pseudo continuous effect is performed, it is suggested that the effect accessory 7 moves to a predetermined effect position in front of the liquid crystal screen 5 and rotates, and the pseudo continuous effect is executed on the liquid crystal screen 5. The character "NEXT" (pseudo continuous pattern) to be displayed is enlarged in the center of the screen. Although not shown in the figure, an effect image showing a clock is displayed behind the letters "NEXT", and the long hand and the short hand rotate counterclockwise and then clockwise. The counterclockwise rotation of the minute hand and the minute hand suggests the execution of the reach rewinding effect (see FIGS. 17B and 18E to 18H), and the clockwise rotation of the minute hand and the minute hand. This suggests execution of the reach reproduction effect (see FIGS. 17D and 19C to 19E).

When the effect display using the characters "NEXT" and the image of the clock is performed, the character "x2" (pseudo icon) is displayed on the upper left side of the liquid crystal screen 5 to suggest that the effect has been developed to the pseudo second consecutive effect. A pseudo-repeated number of times indicating whether the line is a continuous line is displayed in a predetermined color (for example, orange). Then, as the reach rewinding effect, an effect display using the main character and an effect display rewinding together with the symbol variation effect using the decorative design (reverse reproduction) are performed (FIG. 19(E) to ( H)). This reach rewinding effect is performed using the decorative symbol display area 50 of the liquid crystal screen 5.

Regarding the effect display using the hero character, the effect display is performed in which the hero character who has moved to the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 to search for the enemy character returns to the left end of the liquid crystal screen 5 at the time of appearance and disappears from the liquid crystal screen 5 ( 18E and 18F). The main character displayed during this reach rewind production is the same character as the main character displayed during the development suggestion production, but is displayed in a different color (gray in the present embodiment) from the main character. The difference is that

Regarding the symbol variation effect using one decorative symbol, first, in order to return from the state shown in FIG. 18(B) to the state shown in FIG. 18(A), first, the upper left region and the upper right region of the liquid crystal screen 5. The purple left 3 designs and right 3 designs that have moved to one area are displayed as gray left 3 designs and right 3 designs (see FIG. 18(E)). Then, after these gray left 3 designs and right 3 designs are erased from the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIGS. 18F and 18G), the left 3 designs that were displayed in the decorative design display area 50 in the reach development. , The middle 4 symbols, the middle 3 symbols, and the right 3 symbols all start to be displayed as gray decorative symbols, and they slowly move upward toward the liquid crystal screen 5 integrally (see FIGS. 18G and 18H). ).

Note that FIG. 18(H) shows that the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 has returned to the state immediately after the middle symbol having the same number as the reach symbol has passed on the activated line. However, since each of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display area 50 is displayed as a gray decorative pattern, although the arrangement of each decorative pattern is the same as that shown in FIG. 18A, It is possible for the player to easily recognize that it is different from the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 18(A).

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the reach rewind effect is being performed, the effect display in which the symbol variation effect using the decorative symbol is reversely reproduced and the effect display in which the character is used are reversely reproduced. The effect display is performed.

While the reach rewind is performed, the effect display related to the decorative pattern and the character is reversely reproduced, but the display of “×2” indicating the number of pseudo-repetitions, the icon displayed in the area 52, and the hold icon display area The effect display related to the hold icon displayed at 51 is not reversely reproduced. This also applies to the small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53, and each small symbol continues to rotate at high speed while the reach rewind effect is being performed (FIG. 18(A. )-(H)).

When the effect display is rewound by the reach rewind effect to the time point shown in FIG. 18A, the freeze effect is performed (see FIGS. 19A and 19B). Specifically, an effect display is performed in which the gray decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 in the arrangement shown in FIG. 18(H) are made to stand still for a predetermined time (two seconds in the present embodiment). While this freezing effect is being performed, all the effect images displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 remain stationary for 2 seconds, except for each small symbol which continues to rotate at high speed in the small symbol display area 53.

Although not shown in the figure, “×2” indicates the number of pseudo consecutive times of the pseudo consecutive stations in the period in which the reach rewinding effect is performed and the period in which the freeze effect is performed. All effect images displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 are displayed in gray, except for the characters and the small symbol display areas 53 displayed in the small symbol display area 53. As a result, it is possible to effectively give the player the impression that the production has rewound and time has stopped.

Next, when the end timing of the freeze effect is reached, the reach reproduction effect is performed (see FIGS. 17D and 19C to 19E). Specifically, first, all the effect images that are displayed in gray, including each decorative pattern that has been stationary in the decorative pattern display area 50, start to be displayed in the original color, and the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display area 50 is displayed. The variable display of is restarted. That is, the gray left three symbols and the right three symbols that have been stationary become purple, which is the original display color, and the pseudo stop is started. Further, in the middle row, the gray middle 3 designs and the middle 4 designs become purple and blue, which are the original display colors, respectively, and then scroll display of the middle row design row including these middle designs at a low speed. Is started.

As a result, the reach rewinding effect can return the effect to a predetermined point in time of the normal reach (see FIG. 18A), and give the player the impression that the normal reach is restarted from the temporary point. is there.

In addition, after the scroll display of the symbol row in the middle row is started, when a middle symbol showing the same number as the reach symbol (here, three symbols) passes on the activated line, it is exemplified in FIG. 18(B). The same development suggestion effect is performed (see FIG. 19D). That is, the scroll speed of the middle row of symbols is increased and high-speed scrolling is restarted to make it difficult to identify the middle symbols, and the reach symbol (here, the left 3 symbols and the right 3 symbols) is reduced while the liquid crystal screen is displayed. Move to the upper left and upper right of 5. Then, the main character appears from the left end of the liquid crystal screen 5, moves to the center of the liquid crystal screen 5, and a development suggestion effect of searching for an enemy character is performed.

Then, at the start of variation of the first special symbol this time, the sub CPU 131 performs one pseudo continuous production (reach rewind production) during SP reach to rewind the reach production, and finally SPSP reach ( When a variation effect pattern to be developed is set in the upper reach of FIG. 17(F), a development effect (see FIG. 19(F)) that suggests the development to SPSP reach and an introduction effect of SPSP reach (FIG. 19). (See (G)). Since the development effect and the SPSP reach introduction effect are the same effects as the effects described above with reference to FIGS. 11C and 11D, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

At the start of variation of the first special symbol this time, the sub CPU 131 performs one pseudo continuous production (reach rewind production) during SP reach to rewind the reach production, and finally SP reach ( When a variation effect pattern to be developed to the lower reach of FIG. 17(E) is set, following the effect display of FIG. 19(E), FIG. ), a series of effect display of FIG. 11B is performed, and the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is performed in SP reach.

[Features related to reach rewind production]
Reach rewind production has the following main features.
That is, in the reach rewind production, since the characters that appear in the decorative design and the reach production are used, a relatively wide display area in which these decorative designs and characters are displayed (display area including at least the decorative design display area 50) The feature is that the reach rewinding effect is performed using.

Further, in the reach rewinding effect, an effect of reversely reproducing the effect display (decorative pattern, character, background image) related to the symbol display effect using the decorative symbol is performed, while it is displayed in the small symbol display area 53. Since each small symbol continues to rotate at high speed until it develops to SPSP reach (or story reach), there is a feature that an effect of reversely reproducing the fluctuation of each small symbol is not performed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 18, the display color of the icon changes from white to red when the reach is changed from the normal reach to the SP reach (see FIG. 18B). It is continuously displayed in red even when the rendition is being performed or after the reach rendition is rewound until before SP reach development by the rewind rendition (for example, FIGS. 18E to 18H, FIG. 19(A) to (C)). In this way, the reach rewinding effect does not cause an effect of reversely reproducing the icon changing effect such as returning the icon from red to white before the change.

Further, during the reach rewinding effect, there is no characteristic that the display of the number of pseudo-repetitions and the effect of reversely reproducing the effect display for the icon and the hold icon are not performed. That is, for example, even if a game ball is won in the first starting opening 11 and a new hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 51 while the reach rewind effect is being performed, the reach rewind being executed is performed. Due to the effect, the display of the hold icon display area 51 is not returned to the state before the display of the hold icon (FIGS. 18(F) to (H) and FIG. 19(A) to ( See E)).

In addition, since the effect of reversely reproducing the effect display related to the hold icon is not performed, for example, after the icon change effect of changing the hold icon from white to green is performed, the icon change effect is performed more than this icon change effect. By performing the reach rewinding effect of rewinding the reach effect to the previous time point, the display color of the hold icon is not changed from green to white. Further, since the effect of reversely reproducing the effect display related to the icon is not performed, for example, after the icon change effect of changing the icon from green to gold is performed, the icon change effect is more preferable than the effect of the icon change effect. By performing the reach rewinding effect of rewinding the reach effect to the previous time, the display color of the icon is not changed from gold to green.

In addition, after the reach rewind effect is performed, as a suggestive effect that suggests that the jackpot game is more likely to be executed than before the reach rewind effect is performed, a higher reach (for example, SPSP reach or story There is a feature that a development effect (see FIG. 19(F)) that suggests that the game is developed into a reach may be performed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the development effect is performed after the reach reproduction effect is performed.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reach rewind effect described above with reference to FIG. 18 is performed twice during the variable display of the first special symbol once, and finally up to the pseudo third consecutive station. There is a case where the production is developed, and in this case, the development production is easier to perform than the case where the reach rewind production is performed only once and the production is finally developed up to the second pseudo series. There is.
Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the reach rewinding effect to be performed again when the reach rewinding effect is performed.

Further, the present embodiment is characterized in that the speed at which the effect display related to the reach effect is reproduced is the same as the speed at which the effect display related to the reach rewind effect targeted for the reach effect is reversely reproduced. ..

Further, during the reach effect, the reach effect sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speaker 24, whereas when the reach rewind effect targeting the reach effect is performed, the reach effect sound is generated. There is a feature that a special effect sound unique to the reach rewind effect is output, instead of the effect sound that is reproduced in reverse.

[Modifications regarding reach rewinding]
In the present embodiment, the reach rewinding effect is performed in which the reach effect is rewound from the time when the development suggestion effect related to the SP reach effect is performed to the temporary point (see FIG. 18A) in the middle of the normal reach. Although a case will be described as an example, in another embodiment, a reach rewinding effect may be performed in which the effect display related to the reach effect is reversely reproduced until the reach establishment timing that is the start timing of the normal reach. Further, for example, when SPSP reach is performed, a reach rewinding effect that reversely reproduces the effect display related to the reach effect up to the middle of SP reach, or a reach winding that reversely reproduces the effect display related to the reach effect up to the middle of normal reach. A return effect may be performed. That is, the rewinding start time point at which the rewinding rewinding effect rewinding is started and the end point at which the reach rewinding rewinding effect is ended may be different from the time points exemplified in the present embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described as an example where the pseudo continuous effect functions as a reach rewinding effect, but in other embodiments, the reach rewinding effect may be performed separately from the pseudo continuous effect. ..

In addition, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the reach rewinding effect that reversely reproduces the effect display related to the predetermined reach effect is performed, but in other embodiments, the effect display related to the reach effect is not reversely reproduced. Alternatively, a reach rewinding effect may be performed in which the effect is cued to a predetermined point in time of the reach effect. That is, the reach rewind effect may be performed in which the effect display at the rewind start time in the predetermined reach effect is directly switched to the effect display at the rewind end time in the reach effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the speed at which the effect display related to the predetermined reach effect is reproduced and the speed at which the effect display related to the reach rewind effect targeting the reach effect is reversely reproduced are the same, These speeds may be different from each other. That is, in the reach rewinding effect, the speed at which the effect display related to the predetermined reach effect is reversely reproduced may be faster or slower than the speed at which the effect display related to the predetermined reach effect is reproduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the reach rewinding effect, a dedicated effect sound unique to the reach rewinding effect is output, but in another embodiment, during the reach rewinding effect, the reach effect that is the target is output. An effect sound that reversely reproduces the reach effect sound may be output from the speaker 24.

[Termination conditions for time saving game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the ending condition of the time saving game state will be described. Here, FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an end condition for ending the time saving game state. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, conditions for ending the time saving game state are defined for each type of time saving number given by a big hit or a small hit, and information indicating these conditions is stored in the main ROM 102. Therefore, the main CPU 101 performs control for ending the time saving game state based on the information stored in the main ROM 102.

<End condition peculiar to one hour reduction>
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is "big hit", and "7R hour reduction once big hit" is selected as the type of the big hit, One time reduction is given (see FIG. 6(C)). That is, when the number of times of the second special symbol determination made in the time saving game state after the jackpot game including the long open round game of 7R reaches one, the game state is changed from the time saving game state to the normal game state. The state control for shifting is performed.

"7R time reduction 1 time big hit" is one of the 2nd special symbol determination and the 5th 2nd special symbol determination of the suspension of the 4th 2nd special symbol determination, 1/7.5( = 40/300) is a big jackpot prepared assuming that the player aims to win a small jackpot (see FIG. 6B). Therefore, if the time saving game state is continued until the second special symbol determination is performed twice or more, the second special symbol determination is performed six times or more in total, which is more advantageous to the player than expected. There is a risk that the game will be lost.
For this reason, in the present embodiment, in the case of "7R one time saving big hit", the game state is set on condition that the number of the second special symbol determination made in the time saving game state has reached one. It is supposed to shift from the time saving game state to the normal game state.

<End condition peculiar to 5 hours reduction>
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is "big hit", when "7R time reduction 5 times big hit" is selected as the type of the big hit, A time reduction of 5 times is given (see FIG. 6C). That is, when the number of the second special symbol determination performed in the time saving game state after the jackpot game is reached reaches 5, the state control for shifting the game state from the time saving game state to the normal game state is performed. ..
In addition, the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", and when "4R hour short 5 times small hit" or "12R hour short 5 times small hit" is selected as the type of the small hit, 5 times Time saving is provided (see FIG. 6D). That is, when the number of times of the second special symbol determination performed in the time saving game state after the big hit game following the small hit game reaches 5 times, the game state is shifted from the time saving game state to the normal game state. State control is performed.

"7R hour short 5 times big hit", "4R hour short 5 times small hit", or "12R hour short 5 times small hit" is a total of 5 times the second special symbol determination and 4 times the second special symbol determination. In any of the 9th second special symbol determination, is a jackpot (or a jackpot) prepared assuming that the player aims to win a 1/7.5 jackpot (FIG. 6(B )reference). Therefore, if the time saving game state is continued until the second special symbol determination is performed 6 times or more, the second special symbol determination is performed 10 times or more in total, which is more advantageous to the player than expected. There is a risk that the game will be lost.
For this reason, in the present embodiment, in the case of "7R hour-short 5 times big hit", "4R hour-short 5 times small hit", or "12R hour-short 5 times small hit", the second time played in the time-saving game state. On the condition that the number of times of special symbol determination has reached 5, it is supposed to shift the game state from the time saving game state to the normal game state.

<Termination conditions common to 1 time reduction and 5 reductions>
In addition, in the present embodiment, when the time saving of 5 times or the time saving of 1 time is given, the number of times of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol performed after the jackpot game is finished and the time saving game state is entered. On the condition that the total number of judgments and the total number of times has reached 12, the game state is changed from the time saving game state to the normal game state.

By the way, the left area of the game area 10 is not provided with a gate for making a normal symbol determination, and the normal symbol determination is not performed unless the player makes a right stroke. In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed in the normal game state, or when the jackpot game related to the first special symbol determination is being performed, the game state is set to the normal game state. In this normal game state, even if it is determined in the normal symbol determination that the slide member 17 is operated, the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position for only 0.036 seconds, and the player hits the right hit during the jackpot game. Even if done, the game ball cannot be won in the second starting opening 12, and the right of the second special symbol determination is not reserved. This is not limited to the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" and the big hit game is executed, the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", the small hit game The same applies when the jackpot game following is executed.

For this reason, for example, when the above jackpot game is finished in the state where the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved, since the right of the second special symbol determination is basically not suspended, the time saving In the gaming state, the first special symbol determination will be performed first. On the other hand, if the time saving number is a big hit, and the time saving game state is ended on the condition that the first special symbol determination has been performed once after the time saving game state is transferred, It is not possible to accumulate a hold related to the second special symbol determination, and the game property may be greatly deteriorated. This means that, in the time saving game state after the jackpot game is over, for example, an unfamiliar player makes a left hit instead of a right hit, resulting in one or more times of the first special symbol determination being made. Is also the same.

For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to prevent the above problems from occurring, when five time saving or one time saving is given, the first time after shifting to the time saving game state. Until the total number of 1 special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination reaches 12 times, the time saving game state is continued, and the time saving game state is ended on the condition that 12 times are reached.

<End condition peculiar to 100 working hours>
In addition, in the present embodiment, when 100 times are shortened, that is, when “7R 100 times 100 big hits” or “16R hours 100 small wins”, it shifts to the time saving game state after the big hit game ends. After the total number of times of the first special symbol determination and the number of the second special symbol determination that has been performed has reached 100 times, to shift the game state from the time saving game state to the normal game state I am trying.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment ends the time-saving game state at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol of the first time (or the fifth time) ends with respect to the time-saving one time (or the time-saving five times). I have decided. Therefore, the player can hold the second special symbol determination on the condition of four when the first (or fifth) variable display of the second special symbol is being performed.

On the other hand, as an ending condition for 100 times saving time, the condition that the hour saving game state is ended when the number of times of the second special symbol determination in the hours saving game state reaches 100 times is defined as one hour saving time (or an hour saving time). If the same end control as in the case of (5 times) is performed, the second special symbol determination is performed up to 104 times in total, which is excessively advantageous to the player.
For this reason, in the present embodiment, the ending condition that the time saving game state is ended when the number of times of the second special symbol determination in the time saving game state reaches 100 times is not defined.

<Termination conditions common to all shortened times>
In addition, the result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", and the type of small hit is "4R hour short 5 times small hit", "12R hour short 5 times small hit", or "16R hour short 100 times small hit" When it is done, the small hit game which opens the small winning a prize mouth 19 is done.

By the way, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", based on the small hit symbol which is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, the player has three kinds of small hits. It is possible to identify which of these small hits has occurred. That is, the player determines whether or not this small hit is a small hit which is disadvantageous to him based on the small hit symbols that are stopped and displayed (a small hit in which the number of time saved is set to "5" times). It is possible to determine whether or not it is a small hit (small hit whose number of shortening times is set to "100" times) that is advantageous for the player.

Here, for example, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the opening game of the small hit game, the small hit game is finished only by not executing the big hit game following the small hit game. If the configuration that the time saving game state is continued if the number of times saving time remains afterwards is adopted, the following problems may occur. That is, for example, when the number of working hours is set to 100 times, the player wins the small hits based on the small hit symbols that are stopped and displayed each time the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit”. If the type is specified and "4R short time 5 times small hit" or "12R time short 5 times small hit" is disadvantageous to oneself, the game ball is not put into the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hit game, and the reverse. In addition, only in the case of "16R hourly 100 times small hit" which is advantageous to oneself, a time saving of 100 rotations is given by putting a game ball in the V winning opening switch 198 during a small hit game "16R hourly 100 times small hit" There is a possibility that it will be possible to conquer such as continuously generating "small hits".

For this reason, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes the V winning opening switch 198 during the opening game of the small hit game, the game state is shortened at the end of the big hit game that follows the small hit game. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game, the big hit game following the small hit game is not executed, and the game state is changed to the time saving game state after the small hit game is finished. I will not let you. In the present embodiment, when the game ball does not pass the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game, a game state setting process (step S745 of FIG. 47, see FIG. 48) for setting the game state to the time saving game state. By not executing the accompanying big hit game, a control is realized which does not shift the game state to the time saving game state after the small hit game is over.

[Screen display during small game]
Next, the screen display during the small hit game will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 21 is a time chart for explaining the screen display during the small hit game. FIG. 22 is a screen view showing a specific example of the screen display during the small hit game.

When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, as shown in FIG. 21, first, an opening period (“OP in FIG. 21” that continues for a predetermined period (13 seconds in this embodiment)) Period”). Then, when the opening period ends, as the opening game, the slide member 191 operates in a predetermined opening pattern (see FIG. 21). Specifically, the slide member 191 repeats a short opening operation of opening the small winning opening 19 for 0.044 seconds and then closing it for a predetermined interval period (for example, 2.4 seconds) four times. After the fourth short opening operation is performed, the interval period becomes short, for example, about 1.227 seconds, and the slide member 191 opens the small winning opening 19 for 0.044 seconds and then closes the short opening operation. Is repeated 6 times at intervals of about 1.227 seconds. As a result, in the opening period of 15 seconds, the small prize hole 19 is opened 10 times in total.

On the other hand, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the following screen display is performed. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 21, at the beginning of the opening period of the small hit game, a small hit type display (see FIG. 22(A)) for notifying the type of the small hit is performed for 5 seconds, and subsequently, A right-hit suggestion display (see FIG. 22B) for prompting the player to right-hit is displayed for 6 seconds. Then, when 11 seconds (=5 seconds+6 seconds) have elapsed from the start of the opening period, a V area instruction for displaying a V area instruction image for instructing the V area (the inner area through which the game ball of the V winning opening switch 198 passes) is displayed. Display is performed (see FIG. 22C).

When the small hit type display is performed, a special effect sound unique to the small hit type display is output from the speaker 24, and when the right hit suggestion display is performed, the special effect unique to the right hit suggestion display. Sound is output from the speaker 24. The same applies to the case where the V area instruction display is being performed. When the V area instruction display is being performed, a dedicated effect sound unique to the V area instruction display is output from the speaker 24, and the dedicated effect sound is generated. Is a performance sound different from the dedicated performance sound unique to the right-handing suggestion display, which allows the player to more clearly recognize that the right-handing is being urged.

Since this V area instruction display is started 2 seconds before the opening game is started, it is possible to notify the player in advance that the opening game will be started, and to the right hitting instruction display. It is possible to more effectively encourage the player who has not hit the right hand to hit the right hand.

By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 20, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game, the big hit game following the small hit game is not performed, and the game state is It is in a very disadvantageous situation for the player who does not shift to the time saving game state and in which the player cannot accumulate the hold related to the second special symbol determination. Therefore, it is extremely important for the player to prevent the game ball from passing through the V winning opening switch 198.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening switch 198 even if a predetermined time (7 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the open game, V An image different from the area instruction display is displayed. Specifically, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 even after 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the opening game, a predetermined time before the opening game ends (3 seconds before in this embodiment). Is used as the reference time, and the remaining time countdown display for displaying the countdown image for counting down the remaining time until the reference time is displayed (see FIG. 21).

When the remaining time countdown display is started while the V area instruction display is being performed, although not shown in the figure, the remaining sound from the speaker 24 is used instead of the dedicated effect sound unique to the V area instruction display. The output of the special effect sound unique to the time countdown display is started.

<Specific example of V area instruction display and remaining time countdown display>
Next, specific examples of the V area instruction display and the remaining time countdown display will be described with reference to FIG. First, at the beginning of the opening period of the small hit game, for example, a small hit type display is displayed that displays the characters "Challenge BONUS" and a predetermined character that celebrates the small hit (see FIG. 22(A)). Then, following this small hit type display, a predetermined rightward suggestion display is performed (see FIG. 22(A)). Specifically, for example, an arc-shaped arrow imitating a path along which the game ball moves by hitting to the right, and an effect image showing that a predetermined character emits a voice saying "Aim right!" ..

Then, two seconds before the opening game is started, the V area instruction display is started (see FIG. 22(C)). Specifically, a front view image of the small winning opening 19 including the V winning opening switch 198 and its inside viewed from the front is displayed in the lower right area of the liquid crystal screen 5, and a large character "Aim for V" is displayed on the liquid crystal. An animation showing that a triple arrow that is displayed in the lower left area of the screen 5 and in which three arrows including the word “right hit” are superimposed is moving from the upper left to the lower right is displayed above the liquid crystal screen 5. Displayed in.

In addition, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the opening game, this V area instruction display is continued until the opening game ends (see FIG. 21). On the other hand, when the game ball that has entered the small winning opening 19 during the open game passes the V winning opening switch 198, the V winning notification effect (see FIG. 22(G)) corresponding to the passage is started. Then, the V area instruction display is ended.

Next, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 at the timing when 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the open game, the remaining time countdown display is started (FIGS. 22(D) and (E)). reference). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 22D, the characters “remain until end”, the number “4.98” indicating the remaining time up to the reference time on the right side thereof, and “until end”. A band-shaped image including the character "remaining 4.98" and a plurality of characters "right-handed →" arranged in the horizontal direction above and below the number is superimposed and displayed on the V area instruction image related to the V area instruction display.

When this remaining time countdown display is being performed, a plurality of characters "right-handed →" flow from left to right, and the number indicating the remaining time up to the reference time is 0. An animation display related to the remaining time countdown display is performed such that the countdown is performed every 01 seconds (see FIGS. 22D and 22E).

As long as the game ball does not pass the V winning opening switch 198 on the way, the number indicating the remaining time up to the reference time decreases from "5.00" to "0.00" in 0.01 steps. However, this number is displayed in blue when it shows a value between “5.00” and “3.00” (see FIG. 22D), and “2.99” to “0.00”. When a numerical value between the two is displayed, it is displayed in red (see FIG. 22(E)). That is, in the remaining time countdown display, the display mode (color in this embodiment) of the number indicating the remaining time up to the reference time changes at the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed since the remaining time countdown display was started.

Next, when the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening switch 198 even after 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the remaining time countdown display, the remaining time countdown display ends and the V area instruction display is exposed. Trap (see FIG. 22(F)).

Here, when the game ball passes the V winning opening switch 198 while the V area instruction display is being performed, a V winning notification effect for notifying the V winning of the game ball is performed (see FIG. 22(G)). Specifically, for example, the panel lamp 25 (see FIG. 4) arranged in the vicinity of the small winning opening 19 and the V winning opening switch 198 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern, and the liquid crystal screen 5 radiates from the V area. The effect display showing how the light is diffused is performed (see FIG. 22G), and the V area instruction display is ended accordingly.

It should be noted that when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 when the V area instruction display is being performed before the remaining time countdown display is started (see FIG. 22C), the same V winning notification is made. The effect is performed, and the V area instruction display is ended accordingly. Further, when the V area instruction display and the remaining time countdown display are simultaneously performed (see FIGS. 22D and 22E), when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198, the same V winning is achieved. The notification effect is performed, and the V area instruction display and the remaining time countdown display are ended accordingly.

By the way, with the configuration of performing the remaining time countdown display for counting down the remaining time until the end timing of the open game as a reference, the following problems may occur. That is, for example, assuming that it takes about 2 seconds for the player to hit the game ball to the right at the V winning opening switch 198 from the launching device, the remaining time until the end timing is 1 second. Even if the player hits the ball right after that, the game ball will reach the small winning opening 19 only after the end of the open game. Therefore, letting the game ball pass through the V winning opening switch 198, let alone letting the gaming ball win the small winning opening 19, as a result, the right to shift to the time saving gaming state disappears. It will be.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) longer than the average time (for example, 2 seconds) from when the game ball is shot to when it reaches the V winning opening switch 198. ) The front is defined as the reference time, and the remaining time countdown display for counting down the remaining time until the reference time is displayed. Therefore, even if the player makes a right-handed hit after the remaining time indicated by the remaining time countdown display is close to 0 seconds, basically, the player hits the game ball right-handed with respect to the V winning opening switch 198. It is possible to pass it.

In FIG. 22(H), when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game, the game ball is V-winned during the ending period of the small hit game immediately after the open game is finished. It is illustrated that a challenge failure effect is made to notify that the failure has occurred. Specifically, for example, an animation showing that the left door moving rightward and the right door moving leftward abut at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 and the front is closed is displayed, and the liquid crystal screen 5 is displayed. The word "End" indicating that the challenge has failed is displayed in the center of.

As described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball has not passed the V winning opening switch 198 at the timing when 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the open game, The remaining time countdown is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of non-V prizes in which the game ball does not pass through the V prize opening switch 198 during the open game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the interval period during which the slide member 191 keeps closing the small winning port 19 is shortened during the opening game (see FIG. 21). Specifically, the interval period from the short opening operation for opening the small winning opening 19 for 0.044 seconds to the next short opening operation is shortened from 2.4 seconds to about 1.227 seconds. To be done. Therefore, after the interval period is shortened, compared to before the interval period is shortened, the game ball moved to above the slide member 191 that closes the small winning opening 19 is subjected to the next short opening operation. The time to stay on the slide member 191 becomes shorter. Therefore, the synergistic effect of the remaining time countdown display and the shortening of the interval period can further enhance the effect of suppressing the occurrence of non-V winning.

<V-area instruction display and remaining time countdown display modification>
The following configuration may be adopted for the remaining time countdown display. That is, in the present embodiment, when the elapsed time from the start of the open game reaches a predetermined time (7 seconds in the present embodiment), a character "remaining until the end" and a number indicating the remaining time up to the reference time Although the case where the remaining time countdown image including is displayed will be described, in another embodiment, an image different from the remaining time countdown image may be displayed. For example, instead of the remaining time countdown image, when the elapsed time from the start of the opening game reaches a predetermined time, a character that utters a line such as "The remaining time is short. Aim for V early!" is displayed. You may That is, the image displayed when the elapsed time from the start of the open game reaches the predetermined time is the remaining time countdown image as long as it can effectively prompt the player to right-hand. May be different images.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the V area instruction display and the remaining time countdown display are performed at the same time. When the vehicle has not passed through, the V area instruction display may be temporarily interrupted and the remaining time countdown display may be started. In this case, it is preferable that the remaining time countdown image relating to the remaining time countdown display includes the instruction image for instructing the V region.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the right hitting suggestion display is switched to the V area suggesting display 2 seconds before the opening game is started, but in another embodiment, the display form of the right hitting suggestion display is described. The above switching may not be performed by changing to a display mode having the same function as the V area suggestion display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the V area instruction display is continued until the end of the opening game will be described, but even if a right hit is performed immediately before the opening game is ended, the game ball is passed to the V winning opening switch 198. Since it is difficult to do so, the V area instruction display may be ended a predetermined time before the opening game ends (for example, 1.5 seconds before).

<Variation example regarding end condition of time saving game state>
In this embodiment, when the game ball does not pass the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hit game, the big hit game following the small hit game is not executed, and the control not to shift to the time saving game state is performed. To do. On the other hand, in other embodiments, like the hits related to the first special symbol determination, the hits related to the second special symbol determination are all per type, so-called one-kind one-kind type game machines. A configuration similar to the form may be applied. In this case, in, for example, 50% of the hits (per type) related to the first special symbol determination, a jackpot game including a V round game in which the V winning opening switch 198 is long opened so that the game ball can pass, is executed. For the remaining 50% per type, the big hit game including the V round game in which the game ball cannot pass (or is difficult to pass) and the V winning opening switch 198 is shortly opened is executed. Then, when the game ball passes the V winning opening switch 198 during the V round game, another round game following this V round game is executed, and the game state after the jackpot game is finished is "probability variation game state". Set to. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass the V winning opening switch 198 during the V round game, another round game following this V round game is executed, but the game state after the jackpot game is finished is Set to "gaming state".
Here, the "probability variation game state" has a higher probability of being judged as per type (big hit probability) than the normal game state, and the game ball is the second starting opening as in the time saving game state in the present embodiment. It is a game state in which it is easy to win the 12th prize.

[Screen configuration example of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the time saving game state]
FIG. 23 is a screen diagram illustrating a screen configuration of the liquid crystal screen 5 in the time saving game state. When the game is controlled in the time saving game state, the decorative symbol display area 50 and the small symbol display area 53 are formed on the liquid crystal screen 5 as in the normal gaming state, as illustrated in FIG. Further, the right-handed suggestion image 54, the movement bar 55, the movement icon 56, and the pseudo variation number suggestion image 57 are displayed.

When the game is controlled in the time saving game state, it is necessary to hit the gate 16 and the second starting opening 12 to the right. The image 54 is displayed at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal screen 5.

<Small symbol display area 53>
The small symbol display area 53 is an area in which three small symbols that rotate counterclockwise along with the variable display of the second special symbol (or the first special symbol) are displayed, and are described above with reference to FIG. It is the same display area as the small symbol display area 53 formed in the gaming state. In the time saving game state, the right hitting suggestive image 54 which is not displayed in the normal game state is displayed, so the small symbol display area 53 is formed at a position slightly lower than in the normal game state (FIG. 7). And FIG. 23).

<Movement bar 55 and movement icon 56>
The moving bar 55 corresponds to one time variable display of the second special symbol, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the moving icon 56 located at the left end of the moving bar 55 moves to the right. Start moving towards. Here, if the number of times saved is set to one, the variable display of the second special symbol according to the first special symbol determination of the first time performed after shifting to the time saving game state (hereinafter referred to as "this variation ") is being performed, the game is controlled in the time saving game state, so that it is possible to store up to four reservations related to the second special symbol determination. On the right side of the moving bar 55, there is provided an area for displaying a holding suggestion icon that is displayed in a number corresponding to the holding number of the second special symbol determination, and every time the right of the second special symbol determination is held. The hold suggestion icon is displayed. In FIG. 23, when the main fluctuation is performed, it is suggested that three game balls are won in the second starting opening 12 during the main fluctuation and three reservations related to the second special symbol determination are accumulated. Therefore, a state in which three hold suggestion icons are displayed is illustrated.

In addition, the hold suggestion icon related to the second special symbol determination displayed on the moving bar 55 does not move like the hold icon related to the first special symbol determination displayed in the hold icon display area 51, and, It is not the target of the icon change effect (icon change success effect or icon change failure effect).

When the number of hour reductions is set to 1, the movement icon 56 that has begun to move at the timing when the main fluctuation starts slowly moves to the right with the passage of time, and during the main fluctuation. The vicinity of the right end of the moving bar 55 is reached (see FIG. 27A). Then, when the move icon 56 reaches the vicinity of the right end of the move bar 55, a challenge battle effect (see FIG. 24(H)) described later is started. This challenge battle production, the second special symbol determination of the first time saving corresponding to this variation, and the four second special symbol determination that is held, a total of five second special symbol determination result is either It is an effect performed to notify whether or not it is a "small hit".

That is, in the conventional case, it is common to perform a variable effect for each of the above-mentioned five second special symbol determinations and notify the winning (whether or not a small hit) for each second special symbol determination. However, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, one challenge battle effect (FIG. 24 (to show whether or not any one of the five determination results of the second special symbol determination is a “small hit”) (FIG. H) (see) is adopted. If any of the five second special symbol determination results is “small hit”, the winning effect (see FIG. 24(K)) is executed as the result effect of the challenge battle effect, and the five fifth When there is no "small hit" in the determination result of the 2 special symbol determination (when all are lost), defeat production (see FIG. 24(I)) is executed as the result production of the challenge battle production.

<Pseudo-variation number suggestion image 57>
The pseudo variation number suggesting image 57 displays the number of variation display of the second special symbol performed in the time saving game state with a small number (or natural number).

(When the number of hours saved is 1)
If the number of times saved is 1, once, the variation pattern of the second special symbol of the first reduction of time (final variation) is relatively long (for example, 130 seconds) variation pattern of the second special symbol is always selected. .. This is because during the variable display of the second special symbol of the first rotation, the player is urged to hit right and four reserves related to the second special symbol determination are accumulated. Then, while the variable display of the second special symbol (the above-mentioned fluctuation) is being performed, in the decorative symbol display area 50, the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving game state is being performed a plurality of times. In order to imitate, the decorative symbol is variably displayed for a time shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol (for example, 5 seconds), and then pseudo shortened variation for pseudo stop (for example, 1 second) is repeated.
In this way, by repeating the pseudo shortening variation during one variation display of the second special symbol, it is possible to make the player feel as if the number of holdings related to the second special symbol determination is reduced, and the player You can effectively encourage right-handedness against. In other words, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from hitting the ball without launching the game ball during the variable display of the second special symbol once.

Then, each time the pseudo shortening variation is started, the numerical value indicated by the pseudo variation number suggesting image 57 is decreased by 0.1. In the present embodiment, when the number of shortening times is one, since the initial display of the pseudo variation number suggesting image 57 is “1.0”, if the pseudo shortening variation is performed 10 times in total, the pseudo variation number suggesting image 57 is displayed. The numerical value indicated by becomes 0.0, and the challenge battle effect is started.

(When the number of hours saved is 5)
If the number of times saved is 5 times, from the 1st hour reduction to the 4th hour reduction, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is medium (for example, 30 seconds) is selected. To be done. Then, while the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed, in the decorative symbol display area 50, the variable symbol is variably displayed for a time shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol (for example, 2 seconds) (for example, 0. 5 seconds) Pseudo-shortening fluctuation for pseudo-stopping is repeated.

When the number of hours saved is set to 5, if the result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit" (or big hit), and if the result of the second special symbol determination is "miss" In part of the, the reach by the decorative symbol is established by one of the pseudo shortened fluctuations that are repeated during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol once, and by the reach effect that is performed when the reach is realized, the winning (small hit) Or jackpot) or lose.
Which of the pseudo shortening variations is repeated to establish the reach depends on the variation pattern of the second special symbol and the effect pattern selected for this variation pattern.
On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “miss” and it is determined that the reach effect is not performed, the reach of the second special symbol determination is not established in any pseudo shortening variation, and the determination result of the second special symbol determination is Notify that it is a "miss".

By adopting such a configuration, when the number of time saving is less than 5 times less than 100 times, the number of time saving is given, by repeating the pseudo shortening variation, more second special symbol determination is performed than actual. It can be made to appear as if you are doing it, and you can get a high effect.

It should be noted that this pseudo shortening variation is characterized in that it is not performed during variation display of the second special symbol when the number of time reductions is set to 100 times.

Returning to the description of the pseudo variation number suggesting image 57 of FIG. 23, the numerical value indicated by the pseudo variation number suggesting image 57 is decreased by 0.1 every time the pseudo shortening variation is started. In the present embodiment, when the number of shortening times is 5, the initial display of the pseudo variation number suggesting image 57 is “5.0”, and when the first variation display of the second special symbol is performed, it is pseudo. Each time the shortened fluctuation is started, the numerical value indicated by the pseudo fluctuation number suggestion image 57 decreases by 0.1 from “4.9”, “4.8”, and “4.7”, and accordingly, The move icon 56 moves to the right on the move bar 55. When the determination result of the second special symbol determination of the first time is “miss”, the numerical value indicated by the pseudo variation number suggesting image 57 is “when the variable display of the second special symbol of the first time ends. The moving icon 56 reaches the right end of the moving bar 55 as the moving icon 56 decreases to "4.0". Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol for the second time is performed, the numerical value indicated by the pseudo variation number suggesting image 57 is "4" every time the movement icon 56 returns to the initial position and the pseudo shortening variation is started. ., "3.9," and "3.8," decreasing by 0.1, and along with this, the move icon 56 moves to the right on the move bar 55. When the determination result of the second special symbol determination of the second time is “miss”, the numerical value indicated by the pseudo variation number suggesting image 57 is “when the variable display of the second special symbol of the second time ends. The movement icon 56 reaches the right end of the movement bar 55 while decreasing to 3.0”. On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination of the second time is “small hit” (or “miss”), before the numerical value indicated by the pseudo variation number suggesting image 57 becomes “3.0”, that is, The reach is established before the movement icon 56 reaches the right end of the movement bar 55, and after the predetermined reach effect is performed, the hit notification effect (or the loss notification effect) is performed.

It should be noted that the fifth time-shortening rotation when the number of time-savings is 5 times produces an effect similar to that always performed in the above-described main fluctuation when the number of time-savings is 1, and therefore the description thereof is omitted here.

(When the number of working hours is 100)
When the number of shortening times is 100 times, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is relatively short (for example, 2 seconds) as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. In this way, when the number of time saving is 100 times, the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively short, so that the pseudo shortening variation performed when the number of time saving is 1 or when the number of time saving is 5 times. It will not take place. Therefore, the moving bar 55 and the moving icon 56 are not displayed.

In the present embodiment, when the number of shortening times is 100, the pseudo variation number suggesting image 57 is displayed as in the case where the number of shortening times is one or five, but the pseudo variation number suggesting image 57 is displayed. The initial display is "100", and every time the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the numerical value indicated by the pseudo variation number suggesting image 57 is decreased by "1". That is, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination continues to be “miss”, the number indicated by the pseudo variation number suggesting image 57 decreases to “99”, “98”, “97”. Go.
On the other hand, when the number of time saving is 100 times, the pseudo shortening variation is not performed, and thus the moving bar 55 or the moving icon 56 is not displayed during the variation display of the second special symbol.

In addition, when the number of shortening times is 100 times, a small hit of 1/7.5 may be assigned within 100 rotations, so that it is easy to generate a small hit. Therefore, even when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit”, the variation time of the second special symbol is relative as the variation pattern of the second special symbol as in the case of “miss”. A short (for example, 2 seconds) variation pattern is selected. Therefore, when the result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit" when the number of hours saved is 100 times, the reach is established and the reach effect is not performed, but the variable display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is started. Immediately after that, the immediate hit effect of stopping the decorative design and the small design is performed.

[About RUSH Challenge Battle]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a RUSH challenge battle is performed in order to give an easy-to-understand notification whether or not a player enters a RSUH state in which it is easy for a player to attract a small hit by giving a time saving of 5 or 100 times. A series of named effects is performed (see FIG. 24).

In this RUSH challenge battle, one time saving is given, and if the determination result of the first special symbol determination for the first time after shifting to the time saving game state is “miss”, the second special for the first rotation The variation display of the symbol (for example, a long variation of 130 seconds), and the variable display of the second special symbol four times performed when the second special symbol determination that has been held is exhausted (figure 25 (B) and (C)).

Further, in the RUSH challenge battle, one time saving is given, and when the determination result of the second special symbol determination for the first time after shifting to the time saving game state is “small hit”, the first rotation It is performed during the variable display of 2 special symbols (for example, a long variation of 130 seconds) (see FIG. 25(A)).

On the other hand, if the judgment results of the second special symbol judgment performed five times after the time saving is given five times and the time saving game state is entered are “miss”, the second special of the fifth rotation RUSH challenge battle across the variable display of the symbol (for example, a long fluctuation of 130 seconds) and the variable display of the second special symbol that is performed four times when the held second special symbol determination is exhausted. Done.

In addition, when the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment of the fifth time is "small hit" after the time saving is given five times and the time saving game state is entered, the fluctuation of the second special symbol of the fifth rotation. The RUSH challenge battle is performed during the display (for example, long fluctuation of 130 seconds).

[Flow of RUSH Challenge Battle]
FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the RUSH challenge battle. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed in the normal gaming state is "big hit", and when "7R hour shortening once big hit" is selected as the type of big hit, After the jackpot game in which the long open round game is performed seven times, the production of the RUSH challenge battle is performed in the flow illustrated in FIG.

When the 7R jackpot game is over and the game shifts to the time saving game state, first, the first charge promotion effect (see FIG. 24(A)) is performed. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment basically has a configuration in which the gaming ball does not win the second starting opening 12 when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state or when the jackpot game is played. There is. Therefore, immediately after shifting to the time saving game state, the second special symbol is in a stopped state, and the number of holding of the second special symbol determination is also "0". Therefore, in order to start the variable display of the second special symbol, the first charge promotion effect (see FIG. 26(A)) that urges the player to make a right hit is performed.

In response to the first charge promotion effect, the player makes a right hit, and when the game ball wins the second starting opening 12, the first time saving fluctuation starts (see FIG. 26(B)). Specifically, the variable display of the second special symbol, the high-speed scroll display of the three symbol columns in the decorative symbol display area 50, and the high-speed rotation of the three small symbols in the small symbol display area 53 are simultaneously started ( FIG. 26B).

Thus, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the moving bar 55 described above based on FIG. 23 is displayed at the lower end portion of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 24C). Then, the movement icon 56 is displayed at the left end of the movement bar 55 (see FIG. 24D).

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a series of RUSH results of determination of the second special symbol determination of 5 times in total including the second special symbol determination of 1 time saving and the second special symbol determination of 4 times being held. Although a configuration for giving notification by the result production of the challenge battle is adopted, the victory production (see FIG. 24(K)) or the defeat production (see FIG. 24(I)), which is the result production of the RUSH challenge battle, requires 1 hour reduction. It is started during the second variable display of the second special symbol (see FIGS. 25B and 25C). Therefore, at a predetermined timing (timing at which the winning effect or defeat effect is started) during the variable display of the second special symbol for the first time reduction, the four advance numbers related to the second special symbol determination being held four times. It is necessary to acquire the determination information in advance and determine which of the winning effect and the losing effect, the resulting effect is to be performed.

Therefore, in order to start the winning effect or the defeat effect from the variation display of the second special symbol of the first time saving, in order to start the winning effect or defeat effect, hold the second special symbol determination up to the upper limit of 4 There is a need.

Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol for the first time reduction is started, the second charge promotion effect for causing the player to hold the second special symbol determination is held (FIG. 24(E), FIG. 26D).

When the player performs a right hit in response to this second charge promotion effect, the second special symbol is determined every time the game ball wins in the second starting opening 12 because the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable display. The right is suspended, and along with this, in the right area of the moving bar 55, the same number of hold suggestion icons as the number of hold of the second special symbol determination is displayed.

In this way, when the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination reaches “4”, and four hold suggestion icons are displayed on the moving bar 55, the second special symbol determination is held up to the upper limit of four. A charging completion suggesting effect that suggests the accumulation is performed (see FIG. 24(F) and FIG. 26(E)).

Although not shown in FIG. 24, when the above-described pseudo shortening variation is repeated and the numerical value indicated by the pseudo variation number suggesting image 57 becomes “0.0”, and the movement icon 56 moves to the vicinity of the right end of the movement bar 55. The same left symbol and right symbol are pseudo-stopped in the decorative symbol display area 50 to establish the reach (see FIGS. 24(G) and 27(B)). Then, the challenge battle effect in which the main character and the enemy character battle each other is started (see FIG. 24(H), FIG. 27(D) to (G), and FIG. 28(A)).

Then, when the challenge battle ends and it is time to start the winning effect or the losing effect, the sub CPU 131 transmits the variation transmitted from the game control board 100 in order to determine whether to perform the winning effect or the losing effect. The following determination process is performed based on the start command and the hold command. Specifically, based on the information included in the variation start command received from the game control board 100 when the variation display of the second special symbol of this time is started, the second special symbol of the first time reduction of this time Whether or not the determination result of the determination is “small hit” is specified. In addition, based on the preliminary determination information included in the suspension command received from the game control board 100 every time the second special symbol determination is suspended, when the second special symbol determination is suspended, " Specify whether or not it is judged as "small hit". Then, based on these two specific results, it is determined which one of the winning effect and the defeat effect is to be performed.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the determination result of the second special symbol determination for the first time saving this time is “miss”, and the determination results of the four second special symbol determinations that are held are “miss”. , Defeat production (see FIG. 24(I)) is determined to be performed. In this case, after the defeat effect is performed following the challenge battle, a predetermined challenge end effect is performed (see FIG. 24(J)).

On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination for the first time saving this time is "small hit", the sub CPU 131 determines to perform a winning effect (see FIG. 24(K)). In this case, the small hitting game (see FIG. 24(L)) is started after the victory effect is performed following the challenge battle.
Further, the sub CPU 131, the determination result of the second special symbol determination of the first time saving this time is "miss", and any of the four determination results of the second special symbol determination is "small hit" Similarly, when it is specified that there is a winning effect, it is determined to perform the winning effect (see FIG. 24(K)).

It should be noted that this victory effect is started during the variable display of the second special symbol of the time reduction first rotation, but as is clear from the description regarding the above two cases in which it is decided to perform the victory effect, the present implementation In the gaming machine 1 of the form, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first time saving this time is “small hit”, the victory effect is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol of the first rotation. .. On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first time reduction is “miss”, the same victory effect as the above victory effect is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol for the first time reduction. There is a characteristic that it is displayed (see FIGS. 25A and 25B).

[Specific example of RUSH challenge battle]
Hereinafter, a specific example of the RUSH challenge battle will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30. Here, FIG. 25 is a time chart for explaining the effect and the display mode of the small symbols that are performed during the RUSH challenge battle. 26 to 30 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the RUSH challenge battle.

In FIG. 26(A), a state in which the first charge promotion effect described above based on FIG. 24 is performed immediately after the jackpot game related to the first special symbol determination is finished and the state is shifted to the time saving game state is illustrated. Has been done. Immediately after the jackpot game is over and the game is transferred to the time saving game state, the right to determine the second special symbol is not obtained at all. When the right of the first special symbol determination is not reserved, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in a stopped state. For this reason, in the small symbol display area 53, the same small pattern as the regular stop before the jackpot game is stopped is in a completely stopped state in which it is completely stationary.

The first charge promotion effect according to the present embodiment is performed by displaying the charge promotion image in which the character “right hit” is superimposed on the upper left of the large rightward arrow including the character “CHARGE” in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. It is realized (see FIG. 26(A)). In addition, here, since the time has transitioned to the time saving game state of 1 time saving according to “7R time saving 1 time big hit” related to the first special symbol determination, the pseudo variation number suggesting image showing the number “1.0” Is displayed at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 26A).

When the player makes a right hit in the situation where the first charge promotion effect is performed and the game ball wins the second starting opening 12, the second special symbol determination is executed. Then, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, and the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started so that the three symbol columns scroll from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display area 50, and the small symbol display area. At 53, the high speed rotation of the three small symbols is started (see FIGS. 26A and 26B).

Since the start of the variable display of the decorative design is the start of the first pseudo shortening variation, the number indicated by the pseudo variation number suggesting image is “1” as the variable display of the decorative design and the small design is started. 0.0" to "0.9" (see FIGS. 26A and 26B). Further, as soon as the variable display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is started, the movement bar 55 and the movement icon 56 are displayed, and the movement of the movement icon 56 is started (FIGS. 26(B) to (C), FIG. 24). (See (B) to (D)).

When the movement of the movement icon 56 is started, the second charge promotion effect is started (see FIG. 26(D) and FIG. 24(E)). In the present embodiment, in this second charge promotion effect, a reduced image is used which has the same display content as the charge promotion image used for the first charge promotion effect, and which is a reduced version of this charge promotion image. (See (A) and (D)). In addition, in FIG. 26D, the player makes a right hit and the game ball wins the second starting opening 12, and the number of holdings of the second special symbol determination is “1”, and the right side area of the moving bar 55. The state in which one hold suggestion icon is displayed is illustrated.

When the number of holding of the second special symbol determination reaches the upper limit of "4" while the second charge promotion effect is being performed, the holding suggestion icon displayed in the right area of the moving bar 55 becomes four, and charging is performed. A completion suggestion effect is performed (see FIG. 26(E) and FIG. 24(E)). In the present embodiment, this charge completion suggestion effect is realized by changing the character "CHARGE" in the reduced image used for the second charge promotion effect to "MAX".

Next, when it comes to the timing of pseudo-stopping the decorative design with respect to the first pseudo shortening variation, the three decorative designs are pseudo-stopped in a mode ("213" in FIG. 26(F)) showing a gap (FIG. 26(F)). (See), when these decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped for a predetermined time, three symbol rows are restarted and the second pseudo shortening variation is started (see FIG. 26(G)). With the start of the second pseudo shortening variation, the numerical value indicated by the pseudo variation number suggesting image 57 decreases by 0.1 to “0.8” (see FIGS. 26F and 26G). Then, when it comes to the timing of pseudo-stopping the decorative drawing with respect to the second pseudo shortening variation, the three decorative patterns are pseudo-stopped in a manner showing a gap (“824” in FIG. 26(H)), and subsequently, the third pseudo pattern. The shortening fluctuation is started.

In FIG. 27A, as a result of repeating the pseudo shortening variation 10 times, the number shown in the pseudo variation number suggesting image 57 becomes “0.0” and the movement icon 56 is near the right end of the movement bar 55. 9 symbols (left 9 symbols) are pseudo-stopped in the left column of the decorative symbol display area 50, the same 9 symbols (right 9 symbols) are slowly moving from the top in the right column, and reach is reached in 9 symbols. An example is shown in which a reach establishment fueling effect that raises the player's expectation for establishment is performed.

As a result of this reach establishment agitation effect, when the right 9 designs which are the same as the left 9 designs are pseudo-stopped on the activated line, the reach is established (see FIG. 27(B) and FIG. 24(G)). When the reach is established in this way, a development suggestion effect that suggests development into a challenge battle effect is performed (see FIG. 27C). Specifically, the background image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 is changed to a solid white background image, and the reach symbol (here, 9 symbol) displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50 is erased. Then, along with this, the left small symbol and the right small symbol are pseudo-stopped in a mode showing the same number as the reach symbol (here, "9"), while the small and medium symbols continue to rotate at high speed (see FIG. 27(C)). ).

When the development suggestion effect is performed, the moving bar 55 and the moving icon 56 displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 are erased, the hero character and the enemy character face each other, and the challenge battle effect is started (FIG. 27(C)). And (D)). When the challenge battle effect is started in this way, for example, an offense/defense effect representing a state in which the main character and the enemy character engage in offense and defense is performed (see FIG. 27(E)). Then, for example, when the player approaches the middle stage of the challenge battle production, a telop display for displaying the dialogues of the hero character and the enemy character on the liquid crystal screen 5 is performed (see FIG. 27F). Note that FIG. 27(F) exemplifies a state in which the telop display in which the enemy character emits a dialogue is being performed. Further, in this telop display, there are cases where the characters of the serif are white and cases where the characters are red, and the latter case is characterized by higher jackpot reliability than the former case.

Next, when the final stage of the challenge battle production is approached, a propulsion production that raises the player's expectation that the main character defeats the enemy character and wins the battle is performed (see FIG. 27G). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 27(G), an effect display is displayed in which the beam of light emitted from the weapon (ray gun) held by the main character changes toward the enemy character.

When the twisting effect of FIG. 27(G) is performed, the operation promoting effect is performed (see FIG. 28(A)). In this operation promotion effect, an effective period during which the operation of the effect button 26 is valid is set in advance, and, for example, a button image simulating the effect button 26 and “press!” which urges the player to operate the effect button 26. Characters and a validity period gauge showing the remaining time of the validity period are displayed.

<When the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first time saving rotation is a small hit>
Here, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed when the variable display of the second special symbol of the current time saving first rotation is started is "small hit", the game for the operation promotion effect In response to the person operating the staging button 26, a winning streak suggesting that the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first time saving rotation is “small hit” is performed (see FIG. 28(B)). ). Specifically, the three small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 in the reach mode are pseudo-stopped in a mode showing double eyes (here, "999"), and the main character has defeated the enemy character. The characters "defeat!" and the appearance of the protagonist who won the battle are displayed.

If the player does not operate the effect button 26 within the valid period, the winning effect is started in response to the expiration of the valid period.

Then, in the decorative design display area 50 in which the decorative design is hidden, the three decorative designs showing the same flat pattern (here, “999”) as the three small designs are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 28C). ). In addition, here, there is a possibility that the three decorative symbols indicating the double stitches of "999" may change due to the above-described symbol promotion effect, and the three decorative symbols indicating the double stitches of "999" are completely stopped as they are. Has not been confirmed. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 53, the high speed rotation of the three small symbols is restarted as the three decorative symbols indicating the doublet of "999" start to stop pseudo (see FIG. 28(C)). ..

Then, when "16R 100% time reduction small hit" is selected as the type of small hit related to the second special symbol determination of the time saving first rotation, three decorative designs showing the double stitches of "999", It changes to the "777" doublet corresponding to "16R hourly 100 small wins", and along with this, the three small symbols that also show the "777" doublet are pseudo-stopped. Then, as the variable display of the second special symbol of the time reduction first rotation is finished and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, three decorative symbols and three of the doublet of “777” are shown. The small symbols are stopped at the same time (see FIG. 28D).
On the other hand, although not shown in the figure, when "12R hour reduction 5 times small hit" is selected, three decorative patterns showing "999" ditches are "12R hour reduction 5 times small hit". It changes to the "333" doublet corresponding to, and along with this, the three small symbols that also show the "333" doublet are pseudo-stopped. Then, as the variable display of the second special symbol of the time reduction 1 rotation is ended and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, three decorative symbols and three The small design stops at the same time.
In addition, when "4R hour reduction 5 times small hit" is selected, the three decorative symbols indicating "999" are not changed, and the three small symbols indicating "999" are doublet. Pseudo stop. Then, as the variable display of the second special symbol of the time reduction 1 rotation is ended and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, three decorative symbols and three of the zigzag patterns of "999" are displayed. The small design stops at the same time.

FIG. 25(A) shows the movement of the second special symbol and the display performed using the decorative symbol display area 50 when the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first time reduction rotation is “small hit”. It is a time chart showing the correspondence between the effect and the movement of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 53.

Up to this point, with reference to FIGS. 26(A) to (H), FIGS. 27(A) to (G), and FIGS. 28(A) to (D), the determination of the second special symbol determination relating to the first time saving rotation Although a series of effects when the result is "small hit" has been described, in this case, as shown in FIG. 25(A), the variable display of the second special symbol in the first hour reduction is performed. In the first half of the period (130 seconds in the present embodiment), the pseudo shortening variation using the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 50 is repeated, and the three small symbols are rotated at high speed in the small symbol display area 53. ..

Then, when the reach is established, in the small symbol display area 53, the left small symbol and the right small symbol are pseudo-stopped in a mode showing the same number (“9” here) as the reach symbol, and the small and medium symbols continue to rotate at high speed. To do. On the other hand, in the display area including the decorative symbol display area 50, the decorative symbol is hidden and the challenge battle effect is performed. Then, when approaching the end of the variable display of the second special symbol of the time saving first rotation, the above-mentioned victory effect is performed in a state where the three small symbols showing the doublet are pseudo stopped. Then, as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the three decorative symbols and the three small symbols showing the double stitches are completely stopped.

<When all are lost including the hold>
FIG. 25(C) shows that the result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first speed reduction is “miss”, and the four second special symbols accumulated during the variable display of the second special symbol at the first speed reduction. When all the prior determination information corresponding to the suspension of the determination indicates "miss", the movement of the second special symbol, the display effect performed using the decorative symbol display area 50, and the small symbol display area 53 It is a time chart which shows the correspondence with the movement of a small symbol.

The determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first time reduction of this time is "miss", and the suspension of the second special symbol determination accumulated during the variable display of the second special symbol of the first time reduction was consumed. In the case where all are "missed" (see FIG. 25C), the following effects are performed. Specifically, as is clear from the comparison between FIG. 25(A) and FIG. 25(C), one hour/hour reduction is made until the challenge battle effect during the variation display of the second special symbol of the first hour/hour reduction is completed. The same effect as when the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the eye is "small hit" is performed. That is, effects common to the series of effects shown in FIGS. 26(A) to (H), FIGS. 27(A) to (G), and FIG. 28(A) are performed.

On the other hand, if the determination results of the second special symbol determination related to the first speed reduction 1st rotation and the four second special symbol determinations that are suspended are all “miss”, the first time reduction first rotation In the final stage of the variable display of the 2 special symbols, the defeat effect is performed instead of the victory effect (see FIG. 25(C)). Specifically, when the player operates the effect button 26 for the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 28(A), for example, a defeat effect representing a state in which the main character loses the battle with the enemy character and collapses. Is performed (see FIG. 28E). In addition, even when the player does not operate the effect button 26 within the effective period regarding the operation promotion effect, similarly, the defeat effect is performed according to the expiration of the effective period.

In addition, when this defeat production is being performed, the second special symbol of the 1st speed saving rotation is being displayed in a variable display, and the determination result of the 2nd special symbol of the 1st speed saving rotation is "miss", so a small symbol In the display area 53, the three small symbols indicating the reach-missed eyes (for example, “919”) are pseudo-stopped (see FIGS. 28E and 25C).

Subsequently, as the lost symbol is permanently stopped as the second special symbol that was being displayed in a variable manner, the challenge end illustrated in FIGS. 28(F) to (H) and FIGS. 29(A) to (F) ends. The effect is produced (see FIG. 25(C)). Specifically, as the variable display of the second special symbol of the 1st rotation speed reduction is finished and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the same as described above based on FIG. 22(H). First, an animation showing that the left door that moves to the right and the right door that moves to the left abut at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 and the front is closed is displayed, and the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 is displayed. Is displayed as "Challenge finished".

It should be noted that, as the variable display of the second special symbol of the time saving first rotation ends and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the reach lost eye (here, "919") is shown in the defeat production. The three small symbols that have been pseudo-stopped in the mode are stopped as they are (see FIGS. 28E and 28F).

Next, after a predetermined confirmation time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the lost symbol as the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first hold is performed, and the second special symbol As the variation pattern of the symbol, for example, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected. Then, in response to this, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold is started, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first hold is “miss”. And, since the variation pattern of the second special symbol that the variation time is extremely short as 1 second is selected, three small symbols are fast for 1 second with the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold. It rotates (see FIG. 28(G)), and as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the three small symbols indicating the broke (here, “549”) are permanently stopped (FIG. 28). (H), see FIG. 25(C)).

The screen display of the challenge end effect is maintained even after the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold is started and ended (see FIGS. 28F to 28H). ..

Next, when a predetermined confirmation time (eg, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold, the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold As the symbol determination is performed, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, for example, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected. Then, in response to this, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold is started, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the second hold is “miss”. And, because the variation pattern of the second special symbol whose variation time is extremely short as 1 second is selected, three small symbols are fast for 1 second with the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold. It rotates (see FIG. 29(A)), and as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the three small symbols indicating the broke (here, “416”) are permanently stopped (FIG. 29). (B) and FIG. 25(C)).

In addition, even after the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold is started and ended, the screen display of the challenge end effect is maintained (see FIGS. 29(A) and (B)). ..

Next, when a predetermined confirmation time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold, the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold As the symbol determination is performed, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, for example, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected. Then, in response to this, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold is started, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is “miss”. And, because the variation pattern of the second special symbol whose variation time is extremely short as 1 second is selected, three small symbols are fast for 1 second with the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold. It rotates (see FIG. 29(C)), and as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the three small symbols indicating the broke (here, “835”) are permanently stopped (FIG. 29). (D) and FIG. 25(C)).

The screen display of the challenge end effect is maintained even after the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold is started and ended (see FIGS. 29C to 29D). ..

Next, when a predetermined confirmation time (eg, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold, the fourth corresponding to the last hold As 2 special symbol determination is performed, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, for example, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected. Then, in response to this, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold is started, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the fourth hold is “miss”. And, since the variation pattern of the second special symbol whose variation time is extremely short as 1 second is selected, three small symbols are fast for 1 second with the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold. It rotates (see FIG. 29(E)), and as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the three small symbols showing the broke (here, “352”) are permanently stopped (FIG. 29). (F) and FIG. 25(C)).

The screen display of the challenge end effect is maintained from the start to the end of the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold (FIGS. 29E to 29F). reference). Then, after a predetermined fixed time has elapsed since the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold, the left door and the right door are opened and the normal screen corresponding to the normal game state is exposed. (See FIG. 29(G)). At this time, a character "← Return the handle to the left" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 to prompt the player to return to the left-handed stroke, and a voice corresponding to the character is output from the speaker 24.

Up to this point, the challenge end effect has been described with reference to FIGS. 28(F) to (H) and FIGS. 29(A) to (F), but as is apparent from the description, this challenge end effect is time-saving. After the stop display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first rotation is started, the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold is stopped and displayed until a predetermined fixed time has elapsed (FIG. 25). (See (C)). Then, in the state where the screen display related to the challenge end effect is maintained, the discontinuity (here, “919”) for notifying that the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first time reduction in rotation is a real stop (Refer to FIG. 28(F)), similarly, in the state where the screen display related to the challenge end effect is maintained, one by one with a period during which the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold is performed. Barrage (here, "549") notifying that the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the hold of eyes is a loss is stopped (see FIG. 28(H)). Then, in the same state where the screen display related to the challenge end effect is maintained, the second corresponding to the second hold is sandwiched with the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold is performed. The variation (here, "416") notifying that the determination result of the special symbol determination is a loss is stopped (see FIG. 29B), and the variation of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold The interval (here, "835") for notifying that the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is a loss, with the period in which the display is performed stopped (Fig. 29 ( See D)). And finally, with the screen display related to the challenge end effect being maintained, the fourth hold is supported with the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold is performed. The breakage (here, "352") notifying that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a loss is stopped (see FIG. 29(F)).

On the other hand, as described above, while the challenge end effect is performed over the five stop display periods in which the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the decorative symbol is not displayed. Instead, the small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 53 are used to intermittently inform that the determination results of the five second special symbol determinations are lost.

Therefore, it is difficult for the player to notice that the second special symbol determination corresponding to the four reservations is sequentially digested while the challenge end effect is being performed, and a total of five second special symbols including the four reservations. It is possible to effectively perform one challenge end effect that informs that all the determination results of the determination are lost.

<When the 1st speed reduction is missed and there is a small hit in the hold>
FIG. 25(B) shows that the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first speed reduction is “miss”, and the four second special symbols accumulated during the variable display of the second special symbol at the first speed reduction. When the pre-judgment information corresponding to the third hold among the pre-judgment information corresponding to the holding of the judgment indicates “small hit”, the movement of the second special symbol and the decorative symbol display area 50 are used. It is a time chart which shows the correspondence of the display effect performed by and the movement of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 53.

The determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first time reduction of this time is "miss", and the suspension of the second special symbol determination accumulated during the variable display of the second special symbol of the first time reduction is sequentially digested. When the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is “small hit” (see FIG. 25(B)), the following effects are performed. Specifically, as is clear from the comparison between FIG. 25(A) and FIG. 25(B), one hour/hour reduction is made until the challenge battle effect during the variation display of the second special symbol of the first hour/hour reduction is completed. The same effect as when the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the eye is "small hit" is performed. That is, effects common to the series of effects shown in FIGS. 26(A) to (H), FIGS. 27(A) to (G), and FIG. 28(A) are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is “small hit”, in the final stage of the variable display of the second special symbol of the time saving first rotation, the time saving one rotation Despite the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment concerning the eye being "miss", the winning effect is performed (see FIG. 25(B)). Specifically, when the player operates the effect button 26 for the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 28(A), the same victory effect as shown in FIGS. 28(B) to (D) is performed. (See FIGS. 30A and 30B). Specifically, the characters “defeated!” indicating that the main character has defeated the enemy character and a state in which the main character who won the battle is pleased are displayed.

However, the winning effects illustrated in FIGS. 28B to 28D and the winning effects illustrated in FIGS. 30A and 30B are different from each other in the following points.
That is, the winning effect illustrated in FIGS. 28(B) to (D) is an effect performed for the purpose of notifying that the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first time saving rotation is “small hit”. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 53, the three small symbols in the form showing the doublet are stopped after being pseudo-stopped.

On the other hand, the winning effect illustrated in FIGS. 30(A) and 30(B) is for the purpose of notifying that the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is “small hit” here. It is a production performed in. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 53, the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first rotation is “miss”, and the determination result of one of the second special symbol determinations corresponding to four holdings is “ In order to inform that "small hit" is to be achieved, three small symbols showing reach lose eyes (here "9V9") in which the small and medium symbols are "V" are stopped after being pseudo-stopped (Fig. 30(A)). And (B) and FIG. 25(B)). When the small and medium-sized symbols are rotating at high speed, the small and medium-sized symbols momentarily indicate any one of the numbers 1 to 9 and do not indicate "V". Therefore, the display of the three small symbols including the small and medium symbols indicating “V” such as “9V9” is, for example, the medium and medium symbol indicating “1” which is originally displayed after “9” is “ It is realized by substituting a small and medium design showing "V". This also applies to the case of displaying a variegated pattern including a small-to-medium-sized symbol indicating "V".

In this way, when the variable display of the second special symbol of the time reduction 1 rotation is finished and the three small symbols showing the reach lost pattern with the medium and small symbols being “V” are completely stopped, these three small symbols are Zoro. Since the eyes are not formed, the player can recognize that the determination result of the second special symbol in the first time reduction rotation is “miss”. In addition, although the three small symbols that have been stopped do not form a doublet, a small symbol of "V" that suggests that there is a second special symbol determination that is a small hit in the hold (in the present embodiment, medium to small) Since the (symbol) is included, the player can recognize that there is one that will be determined as a "small hit" in the four holdings related to the second special symbol determination. is there.

However, the decorative design is not displayed in the decorative design display area while the winning effect shown in the screen diagrams of FIG. 30A and thereafter is being performed. For this reason, when the winning effect is being performed, is the winning effect being performed with respect to the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first time reduction reduction being “small hit”, or , It is not always easy to determine which one of the four holdings related to the second special symbol determination is performed for the determination of “small hit”, so that the winning effect is extremely entertaining. Can be executed.

Returning to the specific example of the winning effect, when a predetermined confirmation time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first hold As is performed, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, for example, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected. Then, in response to this, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold is started, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first hold is “miss”. And, since the variation pattern of the second special symbol that the variation time is extremely short as 1 second is selected, three small symbols are fast for 1 second with the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold. Rotate (see FIG. 30(C)), and as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the three small symbols showing the small and medium symbols “V” (here, “4V2”) The design is stopped (see FIG. 30(D) and FIG. 25(B)). In addition, here, since the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short at 1 second, the three small symbols showing the small and medium-sized symbols “V” are randomly stopped without being pseudo-stopped.

In addition, during the variation display of the second special symbol of the 1st speed reduction, since the reach production called challenge battle production was performed, when this variation display ends, the reach lost eyes whose medium and small design is "V" (here Three small symbols showing "9V9") are stopped. On the other hand, when the second special symbol determination corresponding to the hold is performed and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short as 1 second, and the reach effect is performed. I will never be told. Regarding the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold, even though the determination result of the corresponding second special symbol determination is “miss”, before the variable display is started. Victory production has started. Therefore, it can be said that there is no need to perform the reach effect during the variable display of the second special symbol this time.
For this reason, after rotating the three small symbols at high speed for 1 second in association with the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold, the medium symbol indicating "V" is included, but the reach is not lost. It is supposed that three small symbols (for example, "4V2") showing the broke are permanently stopped (see FIG. 30(D) and FIG. 25(B)).

It should be noted that, although the winning effect has been performed before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold is started, the screen display of the winning effect is maintained even after the varying display ends. (See FIGS. 30A to 30D).

Next, when a predetermined confirmation time (eg, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold, the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold As the symbol determination is performed, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, for example, a variation pattern in which the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is selected. Then, in response to this, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold is started, but the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the second hold is “miss”. And, because the variation pattern of the second special symbol whose variation time is extremely short as 1 second is selected, three small symbols are fast for 1 second with the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold. Rotate (see FIG. 30(E)), and the small symbol is displayed as a stop symbol as the second special symbol, and the small symbol is a small symbol "V" (here, "5V8"). The design is stopped (see FIG. 30(F) and FIG. 25(B)).

It should be noted that the victory effect has been performed before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold is started, but the screen display of the victory effect is maintained even after the variation display ends. (See FIGS. 30E to 30F).

Next, when a predetermined confirmation time (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold, the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold Although the symbol determination is performed, the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit" here. Therefore, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the variation time selected in the case of a loss is not a variation pattern of a short variation time of 1 second, for example, the variation time of the second special symbol is 16 seconds, which is long. A fluctuation pattern is selected. Then, in response to this, when the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold is started, the small symbol display area 53 is still small while the screen configuration of the winning effect is still maintained. High-speed rotation of the symbol is first performed (see FIG. 30(G)).

When notifying that the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is "small hit", the determination result of the second special symbol determination related to the first rotation is "small hit" In order not to easily distinguish from the case of notifying that there is something, it is preferable to perform the same effect as in the latter case.

Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold is being performed, the same effect as that shown in FIGS. 28C to 28D is performed. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 30(G), in the state in which the three small symbols are rotated at high speed, the three decorative symbols showing double stitches (for example, “666”) are displayed in the decorative symbol display area 50. Pseudo stop. Then, the first movement display (see FIG. 12B) of the symbol promotion effect is started while maintaining the state in which the three small symbols are rotated at high speed, and the second movement display of the symbol promotion effect (FIG. 12 ( In (C)), the “777” doublet (or the same doublet as the doublet that moved to the back), which is different from the doublet that moved to the back, moves so that it jumps out from the back to the front. Along with this, the three small symbols are pseudo-stopped with a doublet (eg, “777”) showing the same number (see FIG. 30(H)). Then, as the small hitting symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the three decorative symbols and the three small symbols showing the same double stitch are simultaneously stopped.

During the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold and the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold, the pseudo stop display of the small symbol is not performed. On the other hand, during the variable display of the second special symbol of the first rotation, and during the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold for which the small hit is informed, the pseudo stop display of the small symbol is displayed. Is done in the same way.

[Characteristics of winning production]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the small hit game is to be executed in the second special symbol determination relating to the first time reduction, the small hit game is notified as a hit notification effect. 28(B) to (D) are performed. In the present embodiment, this victory effect is configured as a character display of "defeat!" indicating that the hero character has defeated the enemy character, and an effect display indicating that the hero character who has won the battle is pleased.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit game is not executed in the second special symbol determination relating to the first time saving rotation (when the determination result is “miss”), it is illustrated in FIGS. 28(B) to (D). There is a feature that the same victory effect as that performed (see FIGS. 30(A) and (B)) is performed.

In addition, during notification of the fact that the small hit game is not executed during execution of the winning effect illustrated in FIGS. 30A and 30B, it is determined that the small hit game is executed. In a mode that suggests that the right of the special symbol determination is reserved (three small symbols showing the reach lost pattern including the medium symbol indicating "V"), there is a feature that the small symbol is stopped (Fig. 30 ( See B)). And, because this small design main stop shows not reachable eyes but reach lost eyes such as "9V9", it has a function as a suggestive effect that suggests that the small hit game is not executed. There is also.

In addition, here, the case where the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold is “small hit” has been described as an example, but, for example, the second special corresponding to the fourth hold In the case where only the determination result of the symbol determination is “small hit”, from the middle of the variable display of the second special symbol of the time saving first rotation, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the fourth hold A similar victory effect will be performed so as to straddle at the end of.

[About the RUSH Challenge Battle in the case of 5 hours reduction]
Up to this point, when one hour reduction is given, from the start of the variation display of the second special symbol of the first reduction of the time reduction, the variation display of the second special symbol corresponding to the third hold which is a small hit ends. I explained about the RUSH challenge battle that will be performed. On the other hand, when 5 hours are given, the effect is performed in the following flow. In other words, from the 1st speed reduction 1st rotation to the 4th speed reduction, in each of the four variable display of the second special symbol, the effect of individually notifying the win (small hit or loss) is performed. Then, for the second special symbol determination of the fifth speed reduction and the four second special symbol determinations that are suspended, the same effect as the RUSH challenge battle performed when one time reduction is given is performed. Be seen. In addition, only in the time saving first rotation, an immediate hit effect (see FIG. 31) described later can be executed on condition that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit”.

[Modifications related to winning production]
The following configurations may be adopted for the winning effect.
In other words, in the present embodiment, by displaying three small symbols indicating the reach lost eyes (or the squared eyes) including the medium symbol indicating “V”, the fluctuation is a loss, but a small hit and a small hit in the remaining hold. It is meant to suggest that there is something. On the other hand, in another embodiment, when there is a small hit in the remaining hold, the three small symbols indicating the reach-missing eyes (or the squares) that do not include the small symbol indicating “V”. May be displayed, and for example, a character or character indicating that a small hit exists in the remaining hold, or control for causing the frame lamp 37 to emit light in a specific light emission pattern may be performed. However, in the case of adopting such a configuration, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination this time is “small hit”, the above-mentioned character or character display and the frame lamp 37 are specified. When the result of the second special symbol determination this time is "small hit" without performing control to emit light in the light emission pattern, the above characters and characters are displayed, and the frame lamp 37 emits light in a specific light emission pattern. It is preferable to perform the control.

Further, in another embodiment, in order to suggest that there is a small hit in the hold without using the small symbol, the number indicating the number of reserved second special symbols is usually displayed in blue. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the above-mentioned numbers are displayed in a rainbow color when there is a small hit in the hold.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the small and medium symbols indicating “V” are the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit” (or “big hit”). It is a small-to-medium-sized symbol that is not displayed during variable display or stop display of the second special symbol that is performed according to the fact. On the other hand, in other embodiments, the small and medium-sized symbols indicating “V” are displayed while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or stopped, and the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit” (or “big hit”). )) also during the variable display and stop display of the second special symbol that is performed, the small and medium symbols indicating "V" are used as one small symbol for notifying "miss" May be.

[About immediate hit production]
FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the flow of the rewinding effect performed in the first time-saving rotation when the time-saving number is set to five. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main CPU 101, after giving the time saving of five times, the determination result of the second special symbol determination first performed after shifting to the time saving game state is "small hit" In this case, the variation pattern selection process for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is executed. At that time, as a variation pattern of the second special symbol, when selecting a variation pattern A in which the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively long at 60 seconds, and the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively 35 seconds. There is a case where the short fluctuation pattern B is selected, and when the fluctuation pattern B is selected, an immediate hit effect having a function as a rewind effect is performed (see FIG. 31 ).

In addition, since the immediate hit effect is an effect that looks like a small hit suddenly after the jackpot game ends, it is not performed if the right related to the second special symbol determination is not reserved at the end of the jackpot game. Preferably.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit”, and the second special symbol determination is suspended at the end of the big hit game following the small hit game according to this “small hit”. If not, then the game ball wins the second starting opening 12 and the second special symbol determination of the time saving first rotation is executed, and even if the determination result is "small hit", the variation pattern B is the same. The configuration that does not select is adopted. In addition, when the result of the first special symbol determination is "7R hour reduction 1 time big hit" and the number of hour reductions is set to 1, as described above, the right to the second special symbol determination at the end of the jackpot game Since it is not held, even if the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first time reduction of the first rotation is "small hit", the variation pattern B is not selected. That is, the immediate hit effect is not performed.

In the gaming machine 1, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed in the time saving game state is "small hit", the effect is performed in the following flow.
That is, in the final stage of the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second special symbol determination, for example, three decorative symbols and three small symbols showing even-numbered squares (for example, "444") are pseudo-stopped (Fig. 31(A)). Next, the above-described symbol promotion effect (see FIG. 31(B)) is performed, but since the type of small hit related to the second special symbol determination this time is "4R time reduction 5 times small hit", No change, the three decorative symbols and the three small symbols showing the even-numbered ditto are pseudo-stopped, and then these symbols are permanently stopped with the stop display of the second special symbol. (See FIG. 31C).

On the other hand, when a predetermined fixed time has elapsed from the above main stop, the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the V winning hole switch 198 during the small hit game, the big winning game using the special winning opening 13 is performed. In the opening period of the big hit game, an opening effect is given in which the kind of the small hit is informed and the player is urged to hit the right hit (see FIG. 31(D)). Then, when a long open round game in which the special winning opening 13 is long opened is being played, the number of rounds of the long open round game is informed, or the total number of award balls that have been paid back is displayed. An effect is produced (see FIG. 31(E)). After that, when the final long open round game ends and the ending period of the big hit game comes, an ending effect that notifies the effect mode after the end of the big hit game is performed (see FIG. 31(F)).

When the jackpot game ends in this way, the game becomes a time saving game state in which a time saving of five times is given. Here, in the case where the second special symbol determination is suspended, as the second special symbol determination relating to the time reduction first rotation, the first second special symbol determination is executed among the suspended ones. .. Here, the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", and when the variation pattern B of 35 seconds variation is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is displayed in a variation for 35 seconds. Along with this, variation effect using a decorative design or a small design is started (see FIG. 31(H) and FIG. 26(B)).

Here, since the fluctuation pattern B of the fluctuation of 35 seconds is selected, the following effects are performed instead of the effects illustrated in FIG. That is, first, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol of the time reduction 1 rotation, the variable display of three decorative symbols (scroll display of three symbol columns) and the high-speed rotation of three small symbols are started. To be done. Immediately after the variable display of these symbols is started, an effect display showing that noise is generated in the entire image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 is performed, and along with this, the three decorative symbols are not displayed. Will be displayed. The decorative pattern is maintained in a non-display state until the effect (see FIG. 31(P)) of pseudo-stopping the double stitches described later is started. The effect display showing how the noise is generated is performed as a rewind suggestion effect that suggests that the rewind effect is performed (see FIG. 31(I)). Next, the character "NEXT" is displayed, and subsequently, a clock rewinding effect is shown in which the time and the hands rotate counterclockwise to rewind the time (see FIG. 31(J)). .. Then, the ending rewinding effect that reversely reproduces the ending effect of FIG. 31(F) (see FIG. 31(L)) and the in-round effect of FIG. 31(E) are performed with this clock rewinding effect as a trigger. The background rewinding effect (see FIG. 31(M)) in which the background image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 is reversely reproduced, and the opening rewinding effect in which the opening effect of FIG. 31(D) is reversely reproduced. (See FIG. 31(N)) and the symbol promotion rewinding effect (see FIG. 31(O)) that reversely reproduces the symbol promotion effect in FIG. 31(B) are sequentially performed. It should be noted that the rewind effect does not necessarily have to rewind the exact same image, and if the effect seems to be rewound, some of the images will not be rewound. May be.

Note that FIG. 31 exemplifies a case where the immediate hit effect does not include the rewind effect related to the small hit game, but in another embodiment, the immediate hit including the rewind effect related to the small hit game. You may make it produce.

The immediate hit effect composed of the series of rewinding effects of FIGS. 31(L) to (O) is the same as the series of FIGS. 31(B) to (F) except for the main stop of the doublet of FIG. 31(C). It is configured as a rewinding effect in which the effect is reversely reproduced at 8 times speed, for example. Although not shown in the figure, some of the immediate hit effects are those used in the effects of FIGS. 31(B) to 31(F) excluding the main stop of the double stitches of FIG. 31(C). Although the effect images of common effect contents are used, the display mode is different from that used for the effects of FIGS. 31B to 31F, in that all the effect images are expressed in gray. There is.

31(B) to (F) except for the main stop of the doublet in FIG. 31(C) in order to make the player feel that a big hit has occurred immediately after the variation effect of FIG. 31(B) is started. ) May be played back in reverse at an even faster 16 times speed, but if the speed of reverse playback is too high, a pseudo continuous production that makes it look like the series of effects is being rewound is performed. There is a possibility that the player may not be able to recognize that this is happening. For this reason, it is preferable to set the reverse playback speed regarding the rewind effect in consideration of these points.

As described above, when the symbol promotion rewinding effect that constitutes the immediate hit effect is performed, the three decorative symbols and the three small symbols showing the double stitches before the symbol promotion effect are in a pseudo stopped state ( 31(P)). When the two kinds of symbols are pseudo-stopped in this way, the symbol promotion effect (see FIG. 31(Q)) is performed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 12, and three decorative symbols and 3 showing the doublet are provided. After one small symbol is pseudo stopped, it is stopped (see FIG. 31(R)).

In addition, when a series of effects of FIGS. 31(H) to (Q) are performed, three small symbols are variably displayed in the small symbol display area 53, but these small symbols are the second special symbols. Since it plays an important role of notifying that the variable display is being performed, the rewinding effect targeting these three small symbols is not performed when the immediate hit effect is being performed.

Hereinafter, the internal configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the processing performed by the gaming machine 1 for realizing the game control and the effect described above will be described.

[Configuration Example of Main RAM 103]
FIG. 32 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the main RAM 103 and various information stored in the main RAM 103. As illustrated in FIG. 32A, in the main RAM 103, the determination storage area 1030, the first reserved storage area 1031, the second reserved storage area 1032, the third reserved storage area 1033, and the fourth reserved storage area 1034. A first reserved storage area 1035, a second reserved storage area 1036, a third reserved storage area 1037, and a fourth reserved storage area 1038 are provided.

The determination storage area 1030 is a storage area in which various information used for the special symbol determination is stored when the special symbol determination is actually executed. The first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 are storage areas in which various information relating to the first special symbol determination is stored. The first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 are storage areas in which various information relating to the second special symbol determination is stored.

As illustrated in FIG. 32(B), the pending storage areas 1031 to 1034 are areas for storing jackpot random numbers acquired by the main CPU 101 in response to a game ball winning the first starting opening 11, respectively. , A region for storing jackpot symbol random numbers, a region for storing reach random numbers, a region for storing variation pattern random numbers, and a region for storing prior determination information.

This pre-determination information is information obtained by pre-determination processing (see step S218 in FIG. 35) described later based on the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number related to the first special symbol determination. .. The pre-determination information is, specifically, information indicating whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, and if it is a big hit, information indicating what kind of big hit it is, the first special It includes information indicating a variation pattern of symbols, information indicating a game state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. The preliminary determination information is stored in the same reserved storage area as the jackpot random numbers, the jackpot symbol random numbers, the reach random numbers, and the variation pattern random numbers used in the preliminary determination process.

As illustrated in FIG. 32C, the reserved storage areas 1035 to 1038 are areas for storing jackpot random numbers acquired by the main CPU 101 in response to the game ball winning the second starting opening 12, respectively. , A region for storing the big hit symbol random number, a region for storing the small hit symbol random number, a region for storing the reach random number, a region for storing the variable pattern random number, and a region for storing the pre-determination information.

This pre-determination information is based on the jackpot random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number related to the second special symbol determination, by the pre-determination process described later (see step S229 in FIG. 36). This is the information that can be obtained. The pre-determination information is, specifically, information indicating whether the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss, and if it is a big hit, what is the kind of that big hit? The information includes, if it is a small hit, information indicating what kind of small hit it is, information indicating the variation pattern of the second special symbol, information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. The pre-determination information is stored in the same reserved storage area as the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number used in the pre-determination process.

The five pieces of information described with reference to FIG. 32B are stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 in order from the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 each time a game ball is won in the first starting opening 11. Stored in either. For example, when five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination are newly acquired in a state where no information is stored in any of the first holding storage area 1031 to the fourth holding storage area 1034, the five pieces of information are: It is stored in the first reserved storage area 1031. Further, for example, when five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination are newly acquired in a state where five pieces of information are stored in each of the first holding storage area 1031 and the second holding storage area 1032, these five pieces of information Is stored in the third reserved storage area 1033.

When the first special symbol determination that is suspended is exhausted, the information stored in the first reserved storage region 1031 is shifted to the determination storage region 1030 when executing the first special symbol determination. The information stored in the second storage area 1032 and the subsequent storage areas is shifted to the first storage area 1031 side. For example, if the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 while the information is stored in each of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the third reserved storage area 1033, The information stored in the reserved storage area 1032 is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1031 and the information stored in the third reserved storage area 1033 is shifted to the second reserved storage area 1032.

In addition, when the second special symbol determination being held is exhausted, the information stored in the first reserved storage region 1035 is shifted to the determination storage region 1030 when the second special symbol determination is executed. It Then, the information stored in the reserved storage areas after the second reserved storage area 1036 is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1035 side.

By the way, even when special symbols are displayed in a variably manner or during the jackpot game, even if a game ball wins the first starting opening 11 (or the second starting opening 12) and various random numbers are acquired, special symbol determination or special The variable display of symbols cannot be displayed immediately.

Therefore, when various random numbers are acquired in such a situation, the main CPU 101 stores the acquired various random numbers in the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1034 as the right of the first special symbol determination, as described above. It is supposed to be stored or stored in the reserved storage areas 1035 to 1038 as the right of the second special symbol determination. On the other hand, when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol determination is not held, and when the jackpot game is not in progress, the main CPU 101 uses various random numbers and the like acquired with the start mouth winning as a trigger. It is supposed to be directly stored in the determination storage area 1030. Specifically, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers acquired when the game ball wins the first starting opening 11 in the determination storage area 1030 instead of the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1034. Further, various random numbers acquired when the game ball wins the second starting opening 12 are stored in the determination storage area 1030 instead of the reserved storage areas 1035 to 1038.

In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when both the right for the first special symbol determination and the right for the second special symbol determination are suspended, the configuration for preferentially digesting the right for the second special symbol determination is provided. Has been adopted. Therefore, in the case where the information related to the holding of the first special symbol determination is stored in the first holding storage area 1031 and the information related to the holding of the second special symbol determination is stored in the first holding storage area 1035. The processing of shifting the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1035 to the determination storage area 1030 has priority over the processing of shifting the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 to the determination storage area 1030. Then executed.

[Timer interrupt processing by the game control board 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a timer interrupt process executed in the game control board 100 will be described. Here, FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process executed in the game control board 100. The game control board 100 repeatedly executes a series of processing illustrated in FIG. 33 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as power-on and power-off. .. The processing of the game control board 100, which will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 33 and thereafter, is performed according to an instruction issued by the main CPU 101 based on a program stored in the main ROM 102.

First, the main CPU 101 executes a random number update process for updating various random numbers such as a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random number, a small hit symbol random number, a reach random number, a variable pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number (step S1). The big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable pattern random number, and the normal symbol random number are added by "1" every time the process of step S1 is performed. A loop counter is used as a counter for performing the process of step S1, and each random number returns to “0” after reaching a preset maximum value.

Following the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 executes the switch process when the detection signal from each switch is input (step S2). This switch processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Subsequent to the processing of step S2, the main CPU 101 executes a special symbol determination and variably displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and then shows the result of the special symbol determination. A special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying the determination symbol is executed (step S3). This special symbol processing will be described later in detail based on FIG. 39.

Subsequent to the process of step S3, the main CPU 101 includes a process of executing a normal symbol determination, displaying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 45 in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying a normal symbol showing the result of the normal symbol determination. Normal symbol processing is executed (step S4). This normal symbol processing will be described later in detail based on FIG. 43.

Subsequent to the processing of step S4, the main CPU 101, as a result of the ordinary symbol determination, determines that the second starting opening 12 is to be opened, and the slide member control for operating the slide member 17 via the slide member control unit 113. The process is executed (step S5). This slide member control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Subsequent to the processing of step S5, the main CPU 101, when it is determined to be a small hit in the special symbol processing of step S3, a small prize for executing a small hit game including an open game using the small winning opening 19 A mouth opening control process is executed (step S6). The small winning opening opening control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

Subsequent to the processing of step S6, the main CPU 101 controls the special winning opening control unit 116 when it is determined to be a big hit in step S3 or when the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 during the small hitting game. A special winning opening opening control process for controlling and opening the special winning opening 13 is executed (step S7). The special winning opening opening control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Subsequent to the processing of step S7, the main CPU 101 executes prize ball processing for controlling payout of prize balls according to winning of the game balls (step S8).

Subsequent to the process of step S8, the main CPU 101 transmits to the effect control board 130 information necessary for determining various commands and effect contents set (stored) in the main RAM 103 in the process steps before step S8. The process is executed (step S9). By performing the process of step S9, the game information regarding the special symbol determination and the special game is transmitted to the effect control board 130. This game information is, specifically, a hold command, a fluctuation start command, a symbol determination command, a big hit opening command, a small hit opening command, a round start command, an ending command, a small winning opening opening start command, and a V winning, which will be described later. Commands, etc.

[Switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 34 is a detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. Following the processing of step S1, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 111, and various types of updating are appropriately performed by the processing of step S1 as illustrated in FIG. Regarding the random numbers (big hit random number, big hit pattern random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number), the first starting opening switch process is executed to obtain the value at the time when the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 111 is input (step). S21). This first starting opening switch processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the second starting port switch 112, and various random numbers (big hit random number, big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number,) that are appropriately updated by the process of step S1. Regarding the reach random number and the variation pattern random number), the second starting port switch process of acquiring the value at the time when the detection signal from the second starting port switch 112 is input is executed (step S22). The second starting opening switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 101 monitors whether or not the detection signal is input from the gate switch 114, and acquires the value at the time when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input for the normal symbol random number that is appropriately updated by the process of step S1. A gate switch process is performed (step S23). This gate switch process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

[First start opening switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 35 is a detailed flowchart of the first starting port switch process in step S21 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 35, following the random number updating process of step S1, the main CPU 101 detects a detection signal from the first starting port switch 111 (specifically, the first starting port switch 111 is turned “ON”). It is determined whether or not the first starting port switch 111 has been turned “ON” based on whether or not the ON signal indicating that the input has been input (step S210). Here, when it is determined that the first starting opening switch 111 is turned "ON" (step S210: YES), the number of reserved U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether or not it is less than the maximum reserved number Umax1 (“4” in the present embodiment) of the first special symbol determination that is present (step S211).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of holdings U1 is less than the maximum number of holdings Umax1 (step S211: YES), the value of the number of holdings U1 is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S212), and the first special symbol. As the acquisition information used for the determination, a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired, and these random numbers are associated and stored in the main RAM 103 (steps S213 to S216).

As described above, various types of acquisition information such as a jackpot random number are acquired in accordance with the acquisition condition that the first starting opening switch 111 is “ON” in the state where the number U1 of reservations is less than the maximum number Umax1 of reservations. When various random numbers are acquired in a situation in which the first special symbol determination and the variable display of the first special symbol can be immediately executed, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 1030 and cannot be immediately executed. When the various random numbers are acquired in step 1, these random numbers are stored in any one of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034.

Following the processing of step S216, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state (the time saving game state in this embodiment) (step S217). The main RAM 103 stores a time saving game flag. At this time, the short game flag is set to "OFF" when the slide member 17 is operated in the operation pattern in which the game ball cannot win the second starting opening 12 when the normal symbol lottery is won, and vice versa. 2 This is a flag that is set to "ON" when the slide member 17 is operated in an operation pattern in which a game ball easily wins in the starting port 12. In step S217, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state, based on whether or not the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON”.

When determining that the current state is not the high base state (step S217: NO), that is, when the time saving game flag is set to “OFF”, the main CPU 101 executes the preliminary determination process (step S218). Specifically, prior to a jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) and a variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 41) described later, whether or not to be a jackpot based on the acquisition information obtained by the processes of steps S213 to S216. Along with the pre-determination, the pre-determination is performed to pre-determine the variation pattern of the first special symbol that is actually selected when the first special symbol determination is executed. The pre-determination process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S218 or determines that it is in a high base state (the time saving game flag is set to "ON") (step S217: YES), it determines the first special symbol. The hold command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S219). This hold command is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination is held, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S8.
In addition, when the process proceeds to step S219 after the process of step S218, a hold command including the preliminary determination information obtained in the process of step S218 is transmitted to effect control board 130.

[Second start opening switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 36 is a detailed flowchart of the second starting opening switch process in step S22 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 36, the main CPU 101, following the first starting opening switch process of step S21, detects a detection signal from the second starting opening switch 112 (specifically, the second starting opening switch 112 is “ON”). It is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 112 has been turned “ON” based on whether or not the “ON signal indicating that it has been turned on” is input (step S220).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the second starting opening switch 112 has been turned “ON” (step S220: YES), the number of hold U2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether or not it is less than the maximum reserved number Umax2 (“4” in the present embodiment) of the second special symbol determination that is performed (step S221).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number U2 of reservations is less than the maximum number Umax2 of reservations (step S221: YES), the value of the number U2 of reservations is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S222), and the second special symbol. As the acquisition information used for the determination, a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random number, a small hit symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired, and these random numbers are associated and stored in the main RAM 103 (steps S223 to S227). ).

When various random numbers are acquired in a situation in which the second special symbol determination and the variable display of the second special symbol can be immediately executed, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 1030 and cannot be immediately executed. When the various random numbers are acquired in step 1, these random numbers are stored in any one of the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038.

Following the process of step S227, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state, similarly to the process of step S217 (step S228). Here, when it is determined that the current state is the high base state (step S228: YES), that is, when the time saving game flag is set to "ON", the preliminary determination process is executed (step S229). The pre-determination process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S229 or determines that it is not in the high base state (the time saving game flag is set to "OFF") (step S228: NO), it determines the second special symbol. The hold command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S230). This hold command is a command for notifying that the second special symbol determination has been held, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission processing in step S8.
In addition, when the process proceeds to step S230 after the process of step S229, the hold command including the preliminary determination information obtained in the process of step S229 is transmitted to effect control board 130.

[Preliminary determination processing by the game control board 100]
Hereinafter, the pre-determination processing executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. Here, FIG. 37 is a detailed flowchart of the preliminary determination process in steps S218 and S229 of FIGS.

When the main CPU 101 determines in the process of step S217 of FIG. 35 that the base state is not high, or in the process of step S228 of FIG. 36 that the base state is high, the main CPU 101 executes the jackpot determination process (step S2181). ). Specifically, when the right of the first special symbol determination is suspended, the jackpot random number acquired when the game ball wins the first starting opening 11, the winning value of the jackpot random number stored in the main ROM 102. (See FIG. 6A) Based on whether or not it matches, it is determined whether or not the jackpot will be determined at the start of the fluctuation. When the right of the second special symbol determination is suspended, the jackpot random number obtained when the game ball wins the second starting opening 12 is for the jackpot winning value and the jackpot stored in the main ROM 102. Based on whether or not it matches with any of the winning values, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a big hit at the start of the variation, or whether it is determined as a small hit at the start of the variation.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines, based on the determination result of step S2181, whether or not it is determined to be a big hit at the start of the fluctuation (step S2182). When it is determined that the jackpot is determined to be a big hit at the start of the change (step S2182: YES), the big hit variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S2183).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit at the start of the fluctuation (step S2182: NO), is it determined as a small hit at the start of the fluctuation based on the determination result of step S2181. It is determined whether or not (step S2184). If it is determined that it is a small hit at the start of the change (step S2184: YES), the small hit change pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S2185).
The right of the second special symbol determination is reserved, and when the obtained jackpot random number matches the winning value corresponding to the jackpot, the process proceeds to step S2185. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the determination result of the first special symbol determination does not result in a small hit, so if the first special symbol determination is suspended and “NO” is determined in step S2182, this step The process proceeds to step S2186 instead of S2185.

When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not determined to be a small hit at the start of the variation (step S2184: NO), that is, the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) that has been suspended is “miss”. If it is, it is determined whether the reach effect is performed during the change (step S2186). Specifically, based on whether or not the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process of step S2181 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102, It is determined whether the reach effect is performed during the change.

When determining that the reach effect is to be performed (step S2186: YES), the main CPU 101 reads the reach variation pattern table from the main ROM 102 and sets it in the main RAM 103 (step S2187).

By the way, if the determination result of the special symbol determination is “miss”, and if the reach effect is not performed during the variation, particularly regarding the first special symbol determination, based on the number of special symbol determinations held at the start of the variation. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. Then, before and after the special symbol determination being held is exhausted, the number of holdings of the first special symbol determination may be different. Therefore, the variation pattern of the special symbol acquired before the special symbol determination is digested may be different from the variation pattern of the special symbol selected when the special symbol determination is actually digested. That is, for the right of the special symbol determination in which the reach effect is not performed during the variation, there is a possibility that an accurate variation pattern of the special symbol cannot be acquired prior to the special symbol determination.

Therefore, when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (step S2186: NO), the process proceeds to step S2189 without performing the variation pattern random number determination process of step S2188 described later.

After setting the big hit variation pattern table, the small hit variation pattern table, or the reach variation pattern table, the main CPU 101 executes variation pattern random number determination processing (step S2188). Specifically, the variation pattern random number acquired at the time of winning the starting mouth together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2181 is one of the random number values defined in the variation pattern table set in the main RAM 103. Based on which random number value matches, the variation pattern of the special symbol to be selected in the special symbol determination performed at the start of the variation is specified.

When the process of step S2188 is executed, or when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (step S2186: NO), the main CPU 101 generates advance determination information and stores it in the main RAM 103 (step S2189). The area in which the preliminary determination information is stored is as described above with reference to FIGS. 32(B) and 32(C).

In this way, the main CPU 101, based on the acquisition information such as the jackpot random number, which is acquired when the game ball wins the first starting opening 11 (or the second starting opening 12), the jackpot based on this acquisition information. Prior to the determination process and the variation pattern selection process being performed, the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) and the variation pattern of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) are held. And get.

[Gate switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 38 is a detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S24 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 38, the main CPU 101, following the second starting opening switch process of step S22, a detection signal from the gate switch 114 (an ON signal indicating that the gate switch 114 has been turned “ON”). It is determined whether or not the gate switch 114 is turned "ON" based on whether or not is input (step S241).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the gate switch 114 has been turned “ON” (step S241: YES), the number T of reserved symbols for normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is a normal symbol previously stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether the number is less than the maximum reserved number Tmax (for example, "4") (step S242).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number T of reservations is less than the maximum number Tmax of reservations (step S242: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the number T of reservations by "1" (step S243), and the processing is suspended. Ordinary symbol random number used for normal symbol determination is acquired and stored in the main RAM 103 (step S244).

[Special symbol processing by game control board 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, details of the special symbol processing executed by the game control board 100 will be described. Here, FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG.

As illustrated in FIG. 39, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a jackpot game is being played based on whether or not the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" (step S300). The jackpot game flag is a flag that is stored in the main RAM 103 and indicates whether or not the jackpot game is being executed. The jackpot game is set to "ON" at the start of the jackpot game and to "OFF" at the end of the jackpot game. Is set. Here, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (step S300: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

When determining that the big hit game is not in progress (step S300: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress based on whether or not the small hit game flag is set to “ON”. Yes (step S301). This small hit game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit game stored in the main RAM 103 is being executed, and is set to "ON" at the start of the small hit game and at the end of the small hit game. It is set to "OFF". Here, if it is determined that the small hit game is in progress (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the small hit game is not in progress (step S301: NO), it determines whether or not the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner (step S302). Here, when it is determined that the variable display of the special symbol is not being displayed (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not the number of holdings U2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is “1” or more. Yes (step S303). If it is determined that the number U2 of reservations is "1" or more (step S303: YES), the number U2 of reservations is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S304).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of holdings U2 is not "1" or more (step S303: NO), whether the number of holdings U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is "1" or more. It is determined (step S305). Here, when it is determined that the number U1 of reservations is “1” or more (step S305: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the number U1 of reservations by subtracting “1” (step S306).

Following the processing of step S304 or the processing of step S306, the main CPU 101 executes the shift processing for the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103 (step S308). Specifically, when executing the shift process subsequent to the process of step S304, the main CPU 101 determines the earliest acquisition information stored in the reserved storage areas 1035 to 1038 for the second special symbol determination. The remaining acquisition information is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 side while being shifted to the determination storage area 1030. Further, when the shift process is executed following the process of step S306, the earliest acquisition information stored in the reserved storage regions 1031 to 1034 for the first special symbol determination is shifted to the determination storage region 1030. At the same time, the remaining acquisition information is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 side.

Following the process of step S308, the main CPU 101 executes the jackpot determination process based on the random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 (step S309). By executing this jackpot determination process, for the first special symbol determination, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined, and when it is determined that it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined. Regarding the second special symbol determination, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit and whether it is a small hit, and when it is determined that it is a big hit, the type of big hit is determined and it is determined that it is a small hit. In this case, the type of small hit is determined.
Then, the special symbol setting information indicating the result of these processes is set in the main RAM 103. This jackpot determination process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the process of step S309, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern selection process of selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol (step S310). This variation pattern selection processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the processing of step S310, the main CPU 101 sets the special symbol setting information set in the processing of step S309, whether this special symbol setting information is related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination. A fluctuation start command including information indicating whether it is related, setting information of the fluctuation pattern set in the process of step S310, information on the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 and the like is set in the main RAM 103 (step S311).

This fluctuation start command is a command for instructing the start of the effect accompanying the variable display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission processing in step S8. As a result, variable display or the like on the liquid crystal screen 5 using a decorative pattern or the like is started.

Following the processing of step S311, the main CPU 101 starts the variable display of the special symbol based on the setting information of the variation pattern included in the variation start command set in the processing of step S311 (step S312). At that time, when the processing of steps S309 to S311 is performed in a state in which the acquisition information (random number) related to the first special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area 1030, in the first special symbol display 41. Start the variable display of special symbols. On the other hand, when the processing of steps S309 to S311 is performed in a state where the acquired information (random number) related to the second special symbol determination is stored, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 42. To do.

Next, the main CPU 101 starts measuring the fluctuation time, which is the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation display in step S312 (step S313).

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S313, or determines that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable display (step S302: YES), it is selected by the process of step S310 from the start of the measurement of the variable time in step S313. It is determined whether the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (step S315). Here, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (step S315: NO), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the variable time has elapsed (step S315: YES), the special symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41 or the second special symbol display device 42. A symbol confirmation command for notifying that it is set is set in the main RAM 103 (step S316). This symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission processing in step S8. As a result, a process of permanently stopping the decorative symbols that have been variably displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in a mode that shows the determination result of the special symbol determination is performed.

Following the processing of step S316, the main CPU 101 ends the variable display of the special symbol started in the processing of step S312 (step S317). Specifically, the special symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol, or lost symbol) set in the process of step S309 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display that has been displaying the special symbol in a variable manner. In addition, the stop display of the special symbol is continued until at least a predetermined symbol determination time (for example, 1 second) elapses.

In this way, the main CPU 101, the first special symbol display 41 the special symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process after variably displaying the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. Alternatively, the second special symbol display 42 is stopped and displayed.

Subsequent to the process of step S317, the main CPU 101 resets the variable time period in which the measurement is started in the process of step S313 (step S318), and when the jackpot is a jackpot game, or when the jackpot is a jackpot. The stop process including the process for starting the small hit game is executed (step S319). The processing during stop will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

[Big hit determination processing by the game control board 100]
FIG. 40 is a detailed flowchart of the big hit determination process in step S309 of FIG. Following the shift process of step S308, the main CPU 101 executes a big hit determination, as illustrated in FIG. 40 (step S3071). Specifically, when a shift process of shifting the acquired information (see FIG. 32(B)) such as a jackpot random number related to the first special symbol determination to the determination storage area 1030 is performed, the shifted jackpot random number is Based on whether or not it matches the winning value of the jackpot random number stored in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 6A), it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot (per type). Here, when it matches the winning value, it is determined to be a big hit, and when it does not match the winning value, it is determined to be a loss.
On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 executes the shift process of shifting the acquired information (see FIG. 32(C)) such as the jackpot random numbers related to the second special symbol determination to the determination storage area 1030, the shifted jackpot random numbers. Is a big hit (per one kind) or a small hit (per two kinds) based on whether or not it matches any winning value (see FIG. 6B) of the big hit random number stored in the main ROM 102. Or not. As illustrated in FIG. 6B, a winning value corresponding to the big hit and a winning value corresponding to the small hit are prepared as the winning value of the big hit random number, and match with the winning value of the former. In this case, it is determined as a big hit, and when it matches the latter winning value, it is determined as a small hit.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines, based on the determination result of step S3071, whether or not the determination result of the special symbol determination this time is a big hit (per type) (step S3072). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is the jackpot (step S3072: YES), the type of jackpot is determined (step S3073). Specifically, the symbol determination table illustrated in FIG. 6C is stored in the main ROM 102, and when the main CPU 101 determines that it is a big hit, the main CPU 102 reads this symbol determination table from the main ROM 102. Set in RAM 103. In this symbol determination table, as described above with reference to FIG. 6C, a random number value for each of “7R hour-shortening 1 time big hit”, “7R hour-shortening 5 times big hit”, and “7R hour-shortening 100 times big hit” Are associated with. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 shifts the jackpot random numbers used in the process of step S3071 to the determination storage area 1030 together with the jackpot random numbers, and a random number value corresponding to which jackpot among the three types of jackpots. Determine the type of jackpot based on whether or not it matches.

The main CPU 101 sets, in the main RAM 103, a jackpot pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in the process of step S3073 as setting information (step S3074). Thereby, in the process of step S317, the jackpot symbol set here is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41 (or the second special symbol indicator 42), and the jackpot is notified. Become. In addition, when the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol determination is performed in step S3071, the set jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is step S3071. When the determination is made, the set jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol indicator 42.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3072: NO), it determines whether or not it is a small hit (two kinds) based on the determination result of step S3071 (step S3076). Here, when it is determined that it is not a small hit (step S3076: NO), a lost symbol is set in the main RAM 103 (step S3077). Thereby, in the process of step S317, the lost symbol set here is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41 (or the second special symbol display device 42), and the loss is notified. Become.

When the main CPU 101 determines that it is a small hit (step S3076: YES), it determines the type of the small hit (step S3078). Specifically, the symbol determination table illustrated in FIG. 6(D) is stored in the main ROM 102, and the main CPU 101 reads this symbol determination table from the main ROM 102 when it is determined that it is a small hit. It is set in the main RAM 103. In this symbol determination table, as described above with reference to FIG. 6D, for each of "4R hour short 5 small hits", "12R hour short 5 small hits", and "16R hour short 100 small hits" Are associated with random number values. On the other hand, the main CPU 101, the small hit symbol random number shifted to the determination storage area 1030 together with the big hit random number used in the process of step S3071 corresponds to which small hit of the above three kinds of small hits. The type of small hit is determined based on whether or not it matches the random number value.

Then, the main CPU 101 sets, in the main RAM 103, the small hit symbol corresponding to the type of the small hit determined in the process of step S3078 as the setting information (step S3079). As a result, during the process of step S317, the small hit symbol set here is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, and the small hit is notified.
In the present embodiment, since a small hit is not prepared for the first special symbol determination (see FIG. 6(A)), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41. Absent.

[Variation pattern selection processing by the game control board 100]
41 is a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S310 of FIG. After executing the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. 39, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the special symbol determination this time is a “jackpot” as in the process of step S3072 (step S3101). .. Here, when it is determined that the big hit (step S3101: YES), the big hit variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3102).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3101: NO), similarly to the process of step S3076, it is determined whether the determination result of the special symbol determination this time is a “small hit” ( Step S3013). Here, when it is determined that the determination result of the special symbol determination this time is "small hit" (step S3013: YES), the small hit variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3104). ..

In addition, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination result of the special symbol determination this time is not “small hit” (step S3013: NO), the determination storage area 1030 together with the big hit random number used for the big hit determination of step S3071. Whether the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102 is determined, and whether the reach effect that makes the player expect a jackpot is performed is determined. (Step S3105). If it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed (step S3105: YES), the reach variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3106). Conversely, when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (step S3105: NO), the variation pattern table for loss is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3107).

Then, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern random number determination processing with reference to the fluctuation pattern table set in the main RAM 103 by the processing of step S3102, the processing of step S3104, the processing of step S3106, or the processing of step S3107 (step S3102). S3108). Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern table, the small hit variation pattern table, or the reach variation pattern table is set in the main RAM 103, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area 1030. The variation pattern is selected by reading the pattern from the variation pattern table that has been set.

When the variation pattern table for loss is set in the main RAM 103, the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination based on the number of reserved storage areas in which various information is stored immediately before the shift process of step S308 is performed) The special pattern determination) specifies the number of holdings, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the specified number of holdings and the presence/absence of the current time saving is read from the fluctuation pattern table for loss, thereby selecting the fluctuation pattern.

By selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in this way, the variation time of the special symbol is inevitably determined.

After selecting the variation pattern, the main CPU 101 sets the setting information of the selected variation pattern in the main RAM 103 (step S3109). The setting information of the variation pattern is included in the variation start command together with the setting information of the symbol set in the main RAM 103 by the jackpot determination process of step S309 described above, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

[Processing during stop by game control board 100]
FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart of the processing during stoppage in step S319 of FIG. After resetting the variable time by the process of step S318, the main CPU 101, as illustrated in FIG. 42, similarly to the process of step S3072, the determination result of the special symbol determination this time is a big hit (per type). It is determined whether or not (step S3191). Here, when it is determined that it is a big hit (step S3191: YES), the big hit game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to "ON" (step S3192).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to "ON" (step S3193). That is, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is the time saving gaming state. Here, when it is determined that the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3193: YES), the time saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3194). As a result, the game state during the big hit game becomes the normal game state, and basically even if the player hits right in order to digest the big hit game, basically the game ball does not enter the second starting opening 12. No, for this reason, the right to the second special symbol determination is not reserved during the jackpot game.

Then, when the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3194 or determines that the time saving game flag is not set to “ON” (step S3193: NO), it sets the big hit opening command in the main RAM 103 ( Step S3195). The big hit opening command is a command for notifying that the opening period before the opening game for opening the special winning opening 13 is started according to one kind starts, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S9. Sent.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination result of the special symbol determination this time is not the big hit (per 1 type) (step S3191: NO), the determination result of the special symbol determination this time is the small hit (per 2 types). It is determined whether or not (step S3197). Here, if it is determined that the small hit (step S3197: YES), the small hit game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to "ON" (step S3198), and the time saving also stored in the main RAM 103. The game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3199).

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, only the second special symbol determination of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination is determined as "small hit". Then, since the game ball does not win the second starting opening 12 in the normal game state, basically, a small hit occurs only in the time saving game state. That is, the small hit basically occurs only when the time saving game flag is set to "ON". Therefore, here, the same determination as in step S3193 is not performed, and the process of setting the time saving game flag to "OFF" in step S3199 is performed.

Following the processing of step S3199, the main CPU 101 sets a small hit opening command in the main RAM 103 (step S3200). The small hit opening command is a command for notifying that the opening period (OP period in FIG. 21) before the opening game for opening the small winning opening 19 is started according to the two types starts, and in step S9. It is transmitted to the production control board 130 by the transmission processing.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a small hit (step S3197: NO), that is, when the determination result of the special symbol determination this time is "miss", the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is " It is determined whether or not it is set to "ON" (step S3202). That is, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the time saving game state.

When determining that the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3202: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the time saving game residual number J is set (step S3203). The time saving game remaining number J indicates the remaining number of times the second special symbol determination is executed in the time saving game state, and in the game state setting process performed when the jackpot game is finished, the execution opportunity of the jackpot game. Depending on the type of big hit (or small hit) that has become, "1" times, "5" times, or "100" times is set. On the other hand, in step S3203, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving game residual number J is set based on whether the time saving game residual number J is a value other than "0". ..

When the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving game residual number J is set (step S3203: YES), that is, when the time saving game residual number J is a value other than "0", the "miss" is the second time. It is determined whether it is a loss related to the special symbol determination (step S3204). Here, when it is determined that the “miss” this time is a loss related to the second special symbol determination, the time saving game residual number J is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S3205). Then, it is determined whether or not the time saving game residual number J is "0" (step S3206), and when it is determined that the time saving game residual number J is "0" (step S3206: YES), the time saving game flag. Is set to "OFF" (step S3207).

By the way, the processes of steps S3205 to S3207 are performed when the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed in the time saving game state is "miss". In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 6 and the like, a time saving of 1, 5, or 100 times is given depending on the type of big hit or small hit, but one time saving In the case of, at the end of the jackpot game, the time saving game residual number J is set to "1" by the process of step S7454 (see FIG. 48) described later. On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed in the time saving game state is “miss”, the variable display of the second special symbol performed according to the second special symbol determination The processing is advanced to step S3205 at the timing of ending. As a result, the remaining time saving game number J becomes "0", and the processing is advanced to step S3207 in order to end the time saving game state under the first ending condition for one time saving illustrated in FIG.

On the other hand, in the case of 5 times saving, at the end of the jackpot game, the saving time remaining number J is set to "5" by the process of step S7456 (see FIG. 48) described later. On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed in the time saving game state is “miss”, the variable display of the second special symbol performed according to the second special symbol determination The processing is advanced to step S3205 at the timing of ending. Then, when this series of processes is repeated 5 times, the time saving game residual number J becomes "0", and the time saving game state is ended by the first end condition for the time saving 5 times illustrated in FIG. The process proceeds to step S3207.

When executing the processing of step S3207, the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol determination this time is not the second special symbol determination when determining that the time saving game residual number J is not set (step S3203: NO). In the case (step S3204: NO), or when it is determined that the time saving game residual number J is not "0" (step S3206: NO), "1" is subtracted from the time saving determination total residual number G stored in the main RAM 102. The value is updated (step S3208). This time saving total remaining number G indicates the remaining number of times the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is executed in the time saving game state, and in the case of 1 time saving or 5 times saving It is set to "12", and is set to "100" in the case of 100 hours reduction (see FIG. 48).

Following the processing of step S3208, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving determination total remaining number G is "0" (step S3209). Here, when it is determined that the time saving determination total remaining number G is “0” (step S3209: YES), the time saving game flag is set to “OFF” to end the time saving game state (step S3210).

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 42, the special symbol determination is executed when the game is controlled in the time saving game state, and if the determination result is “miss”, the special symbol determination is the second. Regardless of whether it is the special symbol determination or the first special symbol determination, the process of step S3208 is always executed. For this reason, in the time saving game state, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "miss" and when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "miss", the time saving determination total residual The number of times G is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1", and when the time saving determination total remaining number G becomes "0", the process proceeds to step S3210, and the time saving game state ends.

On the other hand, for 1 time saving or 5 times saving, the time saving judgment total remaining number G is set to "12" at the end of the jackpot, but the second special symbol judgment in the time saving game state (or the first special The process of step S3208 is executed each time the determination result of (pattern determination) is “miss”, and when the number of times of execution of this process reaches 12 times, each of the time saving 1 time and the time saving 5 times illustrated in FIG. In order to end the time saving game state with the second ending condition for, the process proceeds to step S3210.

On the other hand, the same is true when the number of times saved is 100, and when the number of executions of the process in step S3208 reaches 100 because the initial value of the total number of times saved in judgment G is "100", an example is shown in FIG. Processing is advanced to step S3210 in order to end the time saving game state under the ending condition for 100 times saved.

[Normal symbol processing by the game control board 100]
43 is a detailed flowchart of the normal symbol process in step S4 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 43, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” following the special symbol process of step S3 (step S401). ). This auxiliary game flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the auxiliary game is being performed for a specified number of times to return to the storage position after the slide member 17 remains in the guide position for a specified time, and during the auxiliary game. Is set to "ON", and is set to "OFF" when not in the auxiliary game.

When it is determined in step S401 that the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S401: YES), the process proceeds to the guide member control process of step S5.

When determining that the auxiliary game flag is not set to “ON” (step S401: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol display 45 is displaying the variation of the normal symbol (step S402). ), when it is determined that the variable display of the normal symbol is not being displayed (step S402: NO), it is determined whether the number T of holdings of the normal symbol determination is “1” or more (step S403). Here, if it is determined that the number T of reservations is not equal to or more than "1" (step S403: NO), the process proceeds to the guide member control process of step S5.

When determining that the number T of reservations is “1” or more (step S403: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the number T of reservations by “1” (step S404) and executes the winning random number determination process. (Step S405). Specifically, the first normal symbol random number among the normal symbol random numbers stored in the main RAM 103 by the process in step S244 (see FIG. 38) is the winning symbol relating to the normal symbol determination stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. Based on whether or not any of the values matches, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a hit.

Following the processing of step S405, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a hit based on the determination result of step S405 (step S406), and when it is determined to be a hit ( (Step S406: YES), the hit symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 45 is set in the main RAM 103 (step S407). Conversely, when it is determined that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is not a hit (step S406: NO), the lost symbol is set in the main RAM 103 (step S408).

In addition, in step S407, the main CPU 101 notifies that the slide member 17 operates in the operation pattern shown in step S504 (see FIG. 44) when the current game state is the “normal game state”. The design is set in the main RAM 103. On the other hand, when the current game state is the “time saving game state”, the hit symbol for informing that the slide member 17 operates in the operation pattern shown in step S505 (see FIG. 44) is set in the main RAM 103.

Therefore, even if the gaming state changes after these winning symbols are set until the variable display of the normal symbols ends, the slide member 17 operates in an operation pattern according to the hit symbol that has been set. That is, for example, a hit symbol that notifies that the slide member 17 operates in the operation pattern shown in step S505 (see FIG. 44) is set during the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. When the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and then the hit symbol that has been set is stopped and displayed, the slide member 17 operates according to the operation pattern shown in step S505 (see FIG. 44). become. In other words, even if the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state after the winning symbol is set and the hit symbol is stopped and displayed, in the normal gaming state, step S505 corresponding to the time saving gaming state (Fig. The slide member 17 operates according to the operation pattern shown in FIG.

Following the processing of step S407 or step S408, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is the time-saving gaming state, based on whether or not the time-saving gaming flag is set to "ON". Is determined (step S409). Here, when it is determined that the current game state is not the time saving game state (step S409: NO), the normal symbol variation time for variably displaying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 45 is set to, for example, 8 seconds (step S410). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the current game state is the time saving game state (step S409: YES), the normal symbol variation time is set to 0.5 seconds, for example (step S411). The normal symbol variation time set by the process of step S410 or step S411 in this manner is temporarily stored in the main RAM 103.

Subsequent to the processing of step S410 or step S411, the main CPU 101 starts the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 45 (step S412), and starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variable display (step S413). ).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable state by the normal symbol display device 45 (step S402: YES), it determines whether or not to end the variable display of the normal symbols (step S415). Specifically, whether or not to end the variable display of the normal symbol based on whether or not the elapsed time when the measurement is started by the process of step S413 has reached the normal symbol variation time set in step S410 or step S411. Determine whether. Here, when it is determined that the variable display of the normal symbols is not ended (step S415: NO), the process proceeds to the guide member control process of step S5.

When the main CPU 101 determines to end the variable display of the normal symbol (step S415: YES), it ends the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 45, and is set in the main RAM 103 in the process of step S407. The winning symbol or the lost symbol set in the main RAM 103 in the process of step S408 is stopped and displayed (step S416). Then, the elapsed time when the measurement is started in the process of step S413 is reset (step S417). Next, similar to the process of step S406, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a hit (step S418). Here, when it is determined that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a hit (step S418: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S419). By thus setting the auxiliary game flag to "ON", the auxiliary game for moving the slide member 17 to the guide position is started.

[Slide member control processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the slide member control process in step S5 of FIG. Following the normal symbol processing of step S4, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON", as illustrated in FIG. 44 (step S501). Here, if it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not set to "ON" (step S501: NO), the process proceeds to the small winning opening opening control process of step S6.

When determining that the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S501: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the slide member 17 is in operation (step S502). And when it is determined that the slide member 17 is not in operation (step S502: NO), the hit symbol stopped and displayed in the process of step S416 corresponds to the short game state when the game ball is easily guided to the second starting opening 12. It is a time saving hit symbol that informs that the slide member 17 is operated in the operation pattern to be operated, or the slide member 17 is operated in the operation pattern corresponding to the normal game state in which the game ball is not guided to the second starting opening 12. It is determined whether or not it is a non-time saving per hit symbol for notifying that (step S503). Here, when it is determined that the hit symbol that is stopped and displayed is not the time reduction hit symbol (step S503: NO), the movement pattern of the slide member 17 is set to 0 after moving the slide member 17 from the storage position to the guide position. After 0.036 seconds, the operation pattern of performing one operation of returning to the storage position is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S504). On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit symbol that is stopped and displayed is the time saving hit symbol (step S503: YES), the operation pattern of the slide member 17 is 1 after moving the slide member 17 from the storage position to the guide position. After 92 seconds, the operation pattern of returning to the storage position is performed twice with an interval of 0.5 seconds being read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S505).

After setting the operation pattern in step S504 or step S505, the main CPU 101 causes the slide member control unit 113 to start the operation of the slide member 17 in the set operation pattern (step S506).

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S506 or determines that the slide member 17 is in operation (step S502: YES), whether the operation of the slide member 17 started in the process of step S506 is completed. It is determined whether or not (step S507). Here, when it is determined that the operation of the slide member 17 is completed (step S507: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to “OFF” (step S508). This ends the auxiliary game.

<About the auxiliary game before and after the time saving game state ends>
The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when the number of time saving is set to one, the second special symbol determination of one time, and the second special symbol determination of the four held second special symbol total of five times the second special It has a game property of allocating a "small hit" in any of the symbol determinations.
On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol of the first rotation ends and the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first suspension is started, the number of suspensions of the second special symbol determination U2 becomes "3". Therefore, at this time, if the auxiliary game of the slide member 17 corresponding to the time saving game state (the above-mentioned 1.92-second opening×2 operation) is performed, the right of the sixth second special symbol determination is given. There is a risk of causing it. This also applies to the case where the time saving is given five times.

For this reason, in order to prevent the above problem from occurring, in the present embodiment, when the time saving number is set to one, the game state is set at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol of the first rotation ends. The time saving game state is shifted to the normal game state (see FIG. 25), and the fixed time for which the second special symbol is stopped and displayed according to this variable display is set to a relatively long 10 seconds. ing.

For example, when the normal symbol determination is executed immediately before the variable display of the second special symbol of the first rotation is finished (for example, 0.1 seconds before), since the game state is the time saving game state, the above time saving correspondence The design is set in the main RAM 103. Then, the normal symbol fluctuates for 0.5 seconds (see step S411 in FIG. 43), and as the normal symbol stops at the symbol corresponding to time saving, the slide member 17 is arranged at the guide position for 1.92 seconds and slides. The member 17 is placed in the storage position for 0.5 seconds, the slide member 17 is again placed in the guide position for 1.92 seconds, and then the auxiliary game ends. Therefore, the total time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols to the end of the auxiliary game is 4.84 seconds (=0.5 seconds+1.92 seconds+0.5 seconds+1.92 seconds).

As is clear from the above description, even if the normal symbol determination is made and the symbol corresponding to the time saving is set 0.1 seconds before the time saving game state ends, the fixed time is set to 10 seconds. Therefore, the series of auxiliary games will be finished before the fixed time elapses. Then, until the fixed time elapses, the number U2 of holding of the second special symbol determination is still "4", so even if the game ball wins the second starting opening 12 according to the auxiliary game. The right of the sixth second special symbol determination does not occur.

Also, after the variable display of the second special symbol of the first rotation is finished, it is a time saving game state, so even if an auxiliary game is performed along with the decommissioning of the normal symbol determination, the slide member can be played once in the auxiliary game. Since 17 is placed in the guide position for only 0.036 seconds, the game ball does not enter the second starting opening 12. That is, the right of the sixth second special symbol determination does not occur.

[Small prize opening/closing control processing by the game control board 100]
When the result of the second special symbol determination is "small hit", the small hit game is executed by the small winning opening opening control process of step S6. The small winning opening opening/closing control process executed in the game control board 100 will be described below with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 45 and 46 are detailed flowcharts of the small winning opening opening control process in step S6 of FIG.

Following the guide member control process of step S5, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small hit game flag is set to "ON" as illustrated in FIG. 45 (step S600). Here, if it is determined that the small hit game flag is not set to "ON" (step S600: NO), the process proceeds to the special winning opening opening control process of step S7.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the small hit game flag is set to "ON" (step S600: YES), for example, the elapsed time from the setting of the small hit opening command in the processing of step S3200 is previously performed. Based on whether or not the set opening time has been reached, it is determined whether or not it is during the opening period of the small hit game (step S601). Here, when it is determined that the opening period is in progress (step S601: YES), it is determined whether the opening time has elapsed (step S602). Here, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S602: NO), the process proceeds to the special winning opening opening control process of step S7.

When determining that the opening time has elapsed (step S602: YES), the main CPU 101 resets the winning number X of the game ball to the small winning port 19 stored in the main RAM 103 (step S603), and the small winning port. The control unit 118 starts the opening control of the small winning opening 19 (that is, the operation of the slide member 191 in a predetermined opening pattern (see FIG. 21)) (step S604), and sets the small winning opening opening start command in the main RAM 103. (Step S605).

This small winning opening opening start command is a command for notifying that the opening game of the small hitting game described above based on FIG. 21 has been started, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission processing of step S9. The production control board 130 can specify the timing when the opening game is started by receiving this small winning opening opening start command, and the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 even if 7 seconds have passed from this timing. If not, the remaining time countdown display described above based on FIG. 21 is started.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 45, the main CPU 101 starts measuring the elapsed time after the opening control of step S604 is started, following the processing of step S605 (step S606).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not during the opening period in the small hit game (step S601: NO), for example, the ending time when the measurement is started in the process of step S621 described later ends from the start of the ending period. Based on whether or not the predetermined time has been reached, it is determined whether or not the ending of the small hit game is in progress (step S608). Here, when it is determined that the ending is not in the small hit game (step S608: NO), the small winning opening switch 194 is turned "ON" based on the presence or absence of the detection signal input from the small winning opening switch 194. It is determined whether or not (step S609). Here, when it is determined that the small winning opening switch 194 has been turned "ON" (step S609: YES), it is determined that one gaming ball has won the small winning opening 19, and the winning number X of the gaming balls is set. It is updated to the value obtained by adding "1" (step S610).

The main CPU 101 executes the processing of step S610, determines that the small winning opening switch 194 is not "ON" (step S609: NO), or executes the processing of step S606, the V winning opening switch 198. It is determined whether the V winning opening switch 198 is "ON" based on the presence/absence of the detection signal input from (step S611). Here, when it is determined that the V winning opening switch 198 is turned "ON" (step S611: YES), the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to "ON" (step S612). Here, the V winning flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening switch 198 during the opening game of the small hit game (that is, whether or not the V winning is started), and the small hit game is started. Before being played, it is set to "OFF", and when the game ball is detected by the V winning opening switch 198, it is set to "ON".

Then, the main CPU 101 sets the V winning command in the main RAM 103 (step S613). This V winning command is a command for notifying that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening switch 198 during the opening game of the small hit game, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmitting process of step S9. Therefore, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 can specify that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening switch 198 by receiving this V winning command.

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S613 or determines that the V winning opening switch 198 is not “ON” (step S611: NO), the winning number X of the game balls to the small winning opening 19 is “9”. Is determined (step S614). That is, it is determined whether or not the number X of winnings, which increases by "1", reaches "9" every time the process of step S610 is repeated. Here, when it is determined that the winning number X of the game balls matches "9" (step S614: YES), the lost winning opening opening control for opening the lost winning opening 197 is executed (step S615). That is, by operating the slide member 195 via the losing winning opening opening/closing unit 119, the losing winning opening 197 is opened (see FIGS. 2B and 2C).

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S615 or determines that the winning number X of the game balls does not match “9” (step S614: NO), the prescribed opening operation of the slide member 191 (of the slide member 191) is performed. It is determined whether or not the operation in the predetermined opening pattern) is completed (step S616). Here, when it is determined that the specified opening operation has not ended (step S616: NO), the number of winnings X is the number of gaming balls Xmax (“10” in this embodiment) that defines the closing timing of the small winning port 19. It is determined whether they match (step S617). Here, if it is determined that the winning number X does not match the gaming ball number Xmax (step S617: NO), the process proceeds to the special winning opening opening control process of step S7.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of winnings X matches the number of gaming balls Xmax (step S617: YES) or the standard opening operation is completed (step S616: YES), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S604. The opening control of the small winning opening 19 that has started is ended (step S618), the elapsed time when the measurement started in the process of step S606 is reset (step S619), and the ending time measurement starts (step S620).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the small hitting game is ending (step S608: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the ending time has elapsed (step S622), as illustrated in FIG. Specifically, the main ROM 102 stores time information indicating the length of time from the start to the end of the ending period, and the main CPU 101 ends the ending time when the measurement is started in the process of step S621. However, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed based on whether or not the time indicated by the time information has been reached.

When determining that the ending time has passed (step S622: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the small hit game flag to “OFF” (step S623). This ends the small hit game. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S624). Here, when it is determined that the V winning flag is set to "ON" (step S624: YES), the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" (step S625), and the V winning flag is set to "OFF". Yes (step S626).

When the game ball passes through the V winning opening switch 198 during the opening game of the small hit game, the process of step S612 (see FIG. 45) is executed and the V winning flag is set to "ON". Therefore, at the timing when the small hit game ends, the big hit game flag of step S625 is set to "ON", and the big hit game that uses the special winning opening 13 to finish the second round and subsequent round games is started. Become.
On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game, the process of step S612 is not executed, and the small winning game remains with the V winning flag set to "OFF". End timing (the timing when the ending period of the small hit game ends). Therefore, it is determined to be "NO" in the determination process of step S624, and as a result, the process of setting the jackpot game flag to "ON" in step S625 is not performed. Therefore, the round game after the second round using the special winning opening 13 will not be played. Further, in this case, since the game state setting process of step S745 (see FIG. 47) for shifting the game state to the "time saving game state" is not performed, it is possible to shift to the time saving game state after the small hit game is finished. Absent.

[Winning prize opening control processing by the game control board 100]
47 is a detailed flowchart of the special winning opening opening control process in step S7 of FIG. The main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" (step S720). This jackpot game flag is the process of step S3192 (see FIG. 42) that is executed in response to the jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed as the first special symbol (or the second special symbol), or the V winning flag is " It is set to “ON” by the process of step S625 (see FIG. 46) executed in response to the setting of “ON”. Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game flag is not set to "ON" (step S720: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S8.

When determining that the jackpot game flag is set to “ON” (step S720: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot game opening period is in progress (step S721). Specifically, for example, during the opening period, based on whether or not the elapsed time from setting the opening command related to the jackpot game by the process of step S3195 (see FIG. 42) has reached a predetermined opening time. Determine whether there is.

When the main CPU 101 determines that it is during the opening period (step S721: YES), it also determines whether or not the opening time has elapsed based on whether or not the elapsed time has reached a predetermined opening time (step S721: YES). Step S722). If it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S722: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S8.

When determining that the opening time has elapsed (step S722: YES), the main CPU 101 determines the number of rounds Rmax of the big hit game, the operation pattern of the special winning opening control unit 116, and the like, and stores these information in the main RAM 103. Yes (step S723). By executing the processing of step S723, various times relating to long-winning games such as an interval time between a round and the next round, an ending time after the end of the final round, etc. are also set.

In the present embodiment, three types of jackpots (per one type) are provided: "7R hour-shortening 1-time jackpot", "7R hour-shortening 5 times jackpot", and "7R hour-shortening 100 times jackpot" ( (See FIG. 6(C)), when these jackpots are won, the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" by the process of step S3192 (see FIG. 42), and in any case, the round number Rmax is set to "7". Is set.

On the other hand, there are three types of small hits (per 2 types): "4R hour short 5 times small hit", "12R hour short 5 times small hit", and "16R hour short 100 times small hit" ( 6D), the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" by the process of step S625 (see FIG. 46). That is, the big hit game flag is set to "ON" after the open game constituting the small hit game is played. For this reason, when the "4R time reduction 5 times small hit" is won, the round number Rmax is set to "3", which is one round less, and when the "12R time reduction 5 times small hit" is won, the round number Rmax is 1. When the number of rounds Rmax is set to "11" and the number of rounds Rmax is 100, the number of rounds Rmax is set to "15", which is one round less.

Subsequent to the processing of step S723, the main CPU 101 resets the winning number Y of the game balls to the special winning opening 13 stored in the main RAM 103 (step S724), and the jackpot game also stored in the main RAM 103. The number of rounds R is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S725). The number of rounds R is set to "0" before the jackpot game is started, and "1" is added every time the process of step S725 is performed.

Subsequent to the processing of step S725, the main CPU 101 starts opening control of the special winning opening 13 by the special winning opening control unit 116 (step S726), and the opening time of the opening time which is the elapsed time from the start of the opening control. The measurement is started (step S727). Then, a round start command for notifying that the long open round game has started is set in the main RAM 103 (step S728).

When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not during the opening period in the jackpot game (step S721: NO), for example, based on information indicating which time point in the jackpot game the current state stored in the main RAM 103 is. It is determined whether or not the ending period is immediately after the end of the final round (step S729). If it is determined that the ending period is in progress (step S729: YES), the process proceeds to step S744 described below.

When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not during the ending period in the jackpot game (step S729: NO), for example, based on the information indicating which time point in the jackpot game the current state stored in the main RAM 103 is. It is determined whether or not it is during the interval period (the period between the long open round game and the next long open round game) (step S730). Here, when it is determined that the interval period is in progress (step S730: YES), whether or not the interval time set by the process of step S723 has passed since the special winning opening 13 was closed at the end of the previous round. Is determined (step S731). Here, if it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (step S731: YES), it is the timing to start the next round, so the process proceeds to step S724. Conversely, if it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (step S731: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S8.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not during the interval period (step S730: NO), it determines that it is during the round game, and determines whether or not the detection signal is input from the special winning opening switch 115. It is determined whether or not the winning opening switch 115 is "ON" (step S733). Here, when it is determined that the special winning opening switch 115 is turned "ON" (step S733: YES), the winning number Y of the game ball to the special winning opening 13 is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S734). ).

When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S728, the process of step S734, or determines that the special winning opening switch 115 is not “ON” (step S733: NO), the main winning opening 13 It is determined whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed from the start of opening (step S735). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time when the measurement is started by the process of step S727 reaches the specified opening time (29.5 seconds in this embodiment) stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. ..

When the main CPU 101 determines that the specified opening time has not elapsed (step S735: NO), the winning number Y of game balls in the current long opening round game stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not it coincides with the number of game balls Ymax (for example, "10") that defines the closing timing of the special winning opening 13 (step S736). Here, if it is determined that the number of winnings Y does not match the number of gaming balls Ymax (step S736: NO), the process proceeds to the winning ball process of step S8.

On the other hand, the main CPU 101, when it is determined that the winning number Y matches the gaming ball number Ymax (step S736: YES), or when it is determined that the specified opening time has elapsed (step S735: YES), the big winning opening control unit The control of opening the special winning opening 13 (current long open round game) is terminated at 116 (step S737).

Following the processing of step S737, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current round number R of the jackpot game stored in the main RAM 103 matches the round number Rmax set by the processing of step S723. (Step S738). Here, when it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S738: NO), the process after the special winning opening 13 is closed in order to control the start timing of the next long open round game The measurement of the interval time, which is time, is started (step S739). The interval time when the measurement is started by the process of step S739 is used for the determination process of step S731.

On the other hand, when determining that the number of rounds R matches the number of rounds Rmax (step S738: YES), the main CPU 101 starts measuring the ending time (step S740), and sets the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 103 to " It is reset to "0" (step S741) and the ending command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S742). This ending command is a command for notifying that the ending period of the jackpot game will start, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission processing of step S9.

When the processing of step S742 is executed or when it is determined that the ending period is in progress (step S729: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed (step S744). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time when the measurement is started by the process of step S740 has reached the set ending time set by the process of step S723. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S744: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S8.

When determining that the set ending time has elapsed (step S744: YES), the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process for setting the game state of the gaming machine 1 after the jackpot game is over (step S745). Then, in order to end the jackpot game, the jackpot game flag is set to "OFF" (step S746).

[Game state setting process by game control board 100]
48 is a detailed flowchart of the game state setting process in step S745 of FIG. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, regardless of the type of winning, at least one time saving is given after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, the main CPU 101 first sets the time saving game flag to "ON" in order to shift the game status to the time saving game state (step S7450).

When the time saving game flag is set to "ON", the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of times saving has to be given is one (step S7451). In the present embodiment, “7R 1-hour short-time big hit” is prepared as a type for which 1-time reduction is given (see FIGS. 6C and 6D). For this reason, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of time-savings to be given is one, based on whether or not the type of hit that triggered the execution of the big-hit game this time is "7R hour-shortening once-time big hit". To judge.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of time savings to be given is one (step S7451: YES), it sets the remaining time saving game number J to "1" (step S7452). In this way, the time saving game flag is set to ON and the time saving game residual number J is set to "1", so that the time saving game state is entered after the jackpot game is over, and the second special operation is performed once. The time saving game state continues until the symbol determination is performed.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to store four second special symbol determinations in suspension during the variable display of the second special symbol which is performed according to the one second special symbol determination. However, if the number of time saving is one, because the game state transitions from the time saving game state to the normal game state at the timing when the variable display of this second special symbol ends, the four second special symbols that are withheld Each of the determinations is executed after shifting to the normal game state.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of times to be reduced is not one (step S7451: NO), it determines whether the number of times to be reduced is 5 (step S7453). In the present embodiment, as types of hits to which a time saving of 5 times is given, “7R time saving 5 times big hit”, “4R time saving 5 times small hit”, and “12R time saving 5 times small hit” are prepared ( See FIGS. 6C and 6D). Therefore, the main CPU 101 determines that the number of time reductions to be given is 5 based on whether or not the type of hit that has triggered the execution of the big hit game this time is one of the above three types of big hits or small hits. Determine whether there is.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of time savings to be given is 5 (step S7453: YES), it sets the remaining time saving game number J to "5" (step S7454). In this way, the time saving game flag is set to ON and the time saving game residual number J is set to "5", so that the time saving game state is entered after the jackpot game is over, and the second special of five times is performed. The time saving game state continues until the symbol determination is performed.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the time saving of 5 times is given, four second special symbols are displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol which is performed according to the second special symbol determination of the fifth time. It is possible to accumulate the hold of symbol determination, but if the number of time saving is 5 times, the game state shifts from the time saving game state to the normal game state at the timing when the fifth variable display of the second special symbol ends. Therefore, the four second special symbol determinations that are being held are executed after shifting to the normal gaming state.

When the main CPU 101 sets the time saving game residual count J to "1" in the process of step S7452 or sets the time saving game residual count J to "5" in the process of step S7454, the time saving determination total residual count G is set. It is set to "12" (step S7455). As a result, the total remaining number G of time saving determinations becomes “0”, so that the common termination condition (see FIG. 20) for one time saving and two time saving is satisfied, and the above step S3210 is performed. By the processing of (see FIG. 42), the game state is shifted from the time saving game state to the normal game state.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of shortening times to be given is not 5 (step S7453: NO), that is, when the number of shortening times to be given is 100, the total time saving determination remaining number G is set to “100”. Is set (step S7456). As a result, the time saving judgment total remaining number G becomes "0", so that the end condition (see FIG. 20) peculiar to the case of 100 time saving is satisfied, and the step S3210 (see FIG. 42) is executed. By the processing, the gaming state is shifted from the short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state.

By the way, when the game ball does not pass the V winning opening switch 198 during the opening game of the small hit game, it is determined to be "NO" in the processing of the above step S624 (see FIG. 46), and the big hit flag of step S625 is set. The process of setting to "ON" is not executed. Therefore, it is determined as "NO" in step S720 (see FIG. 47) of FIG. 47, and as a result, the game state setting process of step S745 (see FIG. 48) is not executed.

As is clear from this description, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 198, the game state setting process that should normally be performed at the end of the jackpot game By not executing, the control that does not shift the game state to the time saving game state is realized.

[Timer interrupt processing by the production control board 130]
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets a CTC cycle which is a cycle for performing a timer interrupt process described later. Then, the sub CPU 131 repeats a random number updating process for updating the effect random numbers and the like used for determining the effect contents in a predetermined cycle shorter than the CTC cycle. That is, the sub CPU 131 repeats the random number updating process in a predetermined cycle while the game machine 1 is activated, and repeats the timer interrupt process in the CTC cycle.

Hereinafter, the timer interrupt processing executed in the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. Here, FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process executed in the effect control board 130. The sub CPU 131 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 49 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds), similarly to the timer interrupt process performed by the game control board 100. The process performed by the effect control board 130 described with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 49 and subsequent steps is performed according to an instruction issued by the sub CPU 131 based on a program stored in the sub ROM 132.

First, when the sub CPU 131 receives a command as game information from the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 executes a command receiving process for performing a process based on the received command (step S10). The command receiving process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Subsequent to the processing of step S10, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the small winning opening 19 is open (step S33). In other words, it is determined whether or not the opening game for opening the small winning opening 19 is being executed. Specifically, the sub CPU 131 receives a small winning opening opening start command transmitted from the game control board 100 according to the processing of step S605 (see FIG. 45), and the elapsed time is a predetermined opening time (this In the embodiment, it is determined whether or not the small winning port 19 is open based on whether or not 15 seconds (see FIG. 21) has been reached.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the small winning opening 19 is being opened (step S32: YES), the small winning opening for displaying the remaining time countdown display during the opening game for opening the small winning opening 19 is performed. The opening process is executed (step S33). This processing for opening the small winning opening will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S33 or determines that the small winning opening 19 is not open (step S32: NO), the result effect of the challenge battle effect shown in FIG. 24 (win effect or defeat) It is determined whether or not it is the start timing of production (step S42).

The sub CPU 131 realizes a series of RUSH challenge battles (see FIG. 24) at the start of variation of the second special symbol corresponding to the first rotation when the number of times saved after the jackpot game is set to one. The variation effect pattern setting process of step S1062 (see FIG. 52) for setting the variation effect pattern for is executed. Then, the variation effect start command for instructing the execution of the effect in the variation effect pattern is transmitted to the image acoustic control board 140. This series of processes is similarly performed at the start of the variation of the second special symbol corresponding to the fifth rotation when the number of time saving after the jackpot game is set to five.
On the other hand, the overall CPU 141 of the image/sound control board 140 transmits the data relating to the image/sound control to the effect control board 130 while executing the image/sound control for realizing the effect in the variation effect pattern.

Therefore, in step S42, the sub CPU 131 identifies the progress status of the RUSH challenge battle based on the data relating to the image acoustic control transmitted from the image acoustic control board 140, and based on the identification result, the winning effect or It is determined whether or not it is the result production start timing at which the defeat production should be started.

When determining that it is the start timing of the result effect (winning effect or defeat effect) (step S42: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a result effect control process for controlling execution of the result effect (step S43). The result effect control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S43 or determines that it is not the start timing of the result effect (step S42: NO), the sub CPU 131 executes the command transmission process (step S50). Specifically, the command set in the sub RAM 133 by the command receiving process of step S10, the small winning opening opening process of step S33, and the result effect control process of step S43 is executed by the audiovisual control board 140 (and the lamp control board 150). Send to.
By performing this command transmission process, the image/acoustic control board 140 is instructed to execute an effect by image display, effect sound output, and the like, and execution of an effect by turning on various lamps, character product operation, or the like is performed by the lamp. The control board 150 is instructed.

Then, the sub CPU 131 executes a data transfer process (step S60). Specifically, since the image/acoustic control data is transmitted from the image/acoustic control unit 140, the data is transferred to the lamp control unit 150. As a result, the lamp control unit 150 controls the effect by the effect medium such as the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the effect accessory 7 so as to be synchronized with the effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5, the speaker 24, and the like.

[Command reception processing by the production control unit 130]
FIG. 50 is a detailed flowchart of the command receiving process in step S10 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 50, the sub CPU 131 first determines whether or not the command transmitted from the game control board 100 has been received (step S101). If it is determined that the command has not been received (step S101: NO), the process proceeds to step S32.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the command is received from the game control board 100 (step S101: YES), the command is controlled according to the process of step S219 (see FIG. 35) or step S230 (see FIG. 36). It is determined whether the command is a hold command transmitted from the board 100 (step S102).

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is the hold command (step S102: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes the hold command receiving process (step S103). This hold command reception process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the hold command (step S102: NO), the variation of the received command transmitted from the game control board 100 according to the process of step S311 (see FIG. 39). It is determined whether the command is a start command (step S105). When it is determined that the received command is the fluctuation start command (step S105: YES), the fluctuation start command reception process is executed (step S106). This fluctuation start command reception process will be described later in detail based on FIG.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a fluctuation start command (step S105: NO), the received command is determined by the symbol transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the process of step S316 (see FIG. 39). It is determined whether the command is a command (step S108). If the sub CPU 131 determines that it is a symbol determination command (step S108: YES), it ends the variable display of the decorative symbol and displays the decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination executed when the symbol variation starts. A variation effect end command for instructing the execution of the process of the main stop is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S109).

This variation effect end command is transmitted to the image-sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 by the process of step S50, so that the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) (Or second special symbol) is displayed as a stop on the first special symbol display 41 (or second special symbol display 42), the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination) The decorative symbol and the small symbol indicating “” are stopped on the liquid crystal screen 5.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the symbol confirmation command (step S108: NO), it determines whether the received command is the operation command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 (step S110). .. This operation command is a command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 to notify the information when the lamp CPU 151 of the lamp control board 150 detects the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27, and was operated. The information includes information indicating whether is the effect button 26 or the effect key 27, information indicating which key is operated when the effect key 27 is operated, and the like.
When determining that the operation command has been received (step S110: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets an operation notification command for notifying that the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 has been operated in the sub RAM 133 (step S111).

This operation notification command is transmitted to the image and sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 by the process of step S50, thereby being notified that an operation has been performed, and this notification is an operation promotion effect (for example, FIG. 28A). If it is in the middle), a winning effect (for example, see FIG. 28B) or a defeat effect (for example, see FIG. 28E) will be performed.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the operation command (step S110: NO), the command is a jackpot opening command transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the process of step S3195 (see FIG. 42). Is determined (step S112). Here, when it is determined that the received command is the big hit opening command (step S112: YES), the setting information for notifying the kind of big hit or for starting the big hit opening effect that urges the player to hit the right side A jackpot opening effect start command including "etc." is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S113).

When the sub-CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the jackpot opening command (step S112: NO), the command is transmitted from the game control board 100 in response to the process of step S3200 (see FIG. 42). It is determined whether the command is an opening command for use (step S114). Here, when it is determined that the received command is the small hit opening command (step S114: YES), the big hit type display, the right hitting suggestion display, the V area instruction display, and these displays described above with reference to FIG. The small hit opening effect start command including the setting information for executing the output of the effect sound is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S115).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the small hit opening command (step S114: NO), the command is transmitted from the game control board 100 according to the processing of step S728 (see FIG. 47). It is determined whether the command is a round start command (step S117). Here, when it is determined that the received command is a round start command (step S117: YES), setting information for notifying the number of rounds during the long open round game of the big hit game and for starting the performance during the round A round effect start command including the above is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S118).

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the round start command (step S117: NO), the command is the ending command transmitted from the game control board 100 according to the process of step S742 (see FIG. 47). It is determined whether there is any (step S119). Here, when it is determined that the received command is the ending command (step S119: YES), an ending effect start command including setting information related to the ending effect is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S120).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the ending command (step S119: NO), the command is transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the process of step S605 (see FIG. 45). It is determined whether the command is a mouth opening start command (step S121). Here, when it is determined that it is a small winning opening opening start command (step S121: YES), measurement of the elapsed time from the opening of the small winning opening 19 (that is, the elapsed time from the opening game is started) Is started (step S122).
Based on this elapsed time, the sub CPU 131 controls the above-mentioned remaining time countdown display (see FIG. 21) and the output of the effect sound accompanying it.

Next, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not the small winning opening opening start command (step S121: NO), the command is transmitted from the game control board 100 according to the processing of step S613 (see FIG. 45). It is determined whether or not it is the transmitted V winning command (step S123). Here, when it is determined that it is the V winning command (step S123: YES), a V winning notification effect start command for instructing the start of the V winning notification effect for notifying the V winning of the game ball is set in the sub RAM 133 (step). S124).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the command is not the V winning command (step S123: NO), it executes other processing according to the other command (step S125).

[Hold command reception process by the production control board 130]
51 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command receiving process in step 103 of FIG. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is the hold command (step S102: YES), the hold number for special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 133 is incremented by “1” as illustrated in FIG. The updated value is updated (step S1030). Specifically, when the hold command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the hold number of the first special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding "1", and the hold command related to the second special symbol determination is received. When it is done, the number of reservations of the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding "1".

Next, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the received hold command includes advance determination information (step S1031), and when determining that the advance determination information is not included (step S1031: NO). , Icon display command is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S1037).

This icon display command is a command for instructing the display of a hold icon indicating that the special symbol determination has been held, and is transmitted to the image acoustic control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission processing in step S50.

This icon display command includes winning start opening information, and the overall CPU 141 of the image and sound control board 140 determines which of the special symbol determinations, the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination, is suspended, for example. It is specified based on the winning start opening information. Here, when it is specified that the first special symbol determination is suspended, the icon display command for instructing the execution of the process of displaying the suspension icon in the suspension icon display area 51 is set in the sub RAM 133.
On the other hand, when it is specified that the second special symbol determination has been suspended and, for example, the moving bar 55 is being displayed, an icon display command for instructing execution of a process of displaying a hold suggestion icon in the right area of the moving bar 55. Is set in the sub RAM 133.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the received hold command includes the preliminary determination information (step S1031: YES), the sub CPU 131 stores the preliminary determination information in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 133 (step S1032).

This pre-judgment information may be pre-judgment information regarding the suspension of the first special symbol judgment, or pre-judgment information regarding the suspension of the second special symbol judgment, and pre-judgment regarding the suspension of the first special symbol judgment. The information determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect for the hold icon, and determines what kind of effect pattern the icon change effect is to be executed when executing this icon change effect. It is used for processing.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an icon change effect (see FIG. 13) for the icon is performed. When executing this icon change effect, it is determined which effect pattern to perform. Also when performing, the prior determination information regarding the suspension of the first special symbol determination is used.

On the other hand, in the case of the preliminary determination information regarding the suspension of the second special symbol determination, in the present embodiment, since the icon change effect for the pending suggestion icon displayed on the moving bar 55 is not performed, this preliminary determination The information is not used in the process related to the icon change effect for the pending suggestion icon.
In the present embodiment, in order to realize the RUSH challenge battle (see FIG. 24 ), it is determined which result effect is to be executed before starting the victory effect or the defeat effect which is the result effect of the challenge battle. It is necessary, and the preliminary determination information regarding the suspension of the second special symbol determination is used for the process of determining which of the winning effect and the losing effect, the effect effect is to be performed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 51, the sub CPU 131, following the processing of step S1032, determines whether or not the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 133 is the preliminary determination information regarding the suspension of the first special symbol determination (step S1033). ). Here, if it is determined that the pre-judgment information regarding the hold of the first special symbol determination is not made (step S1033: NO), there is no need to perform the setting related to the icon change effect targeting the hold suggestion icon, so the above step S1037. The process proceeds to.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 133 is the preliminary determination information regarding the suspension of the first special symbol determination (step S1033: YES), it executes the icon change effect lottery (step S1034). .. Specifically, first, an icon change effect random number is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 133. This icon change effect random number is incremented by "1" every time the above-described random number updating process is performed, and the sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the hold command as the icon change effect random number. Then, based on whether or not the change effect random number matches any of the random number values defined in the icon change effect table stored in the sub ROM 132 in advance, it is determined whether or not to execute the icon change effect. To do.

Although not shown in the figure, the random number values defined in the icon change effect table have the following features.
That is, in the icon change effect table, the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the random number value are associated with each other.
And, to the “big hit” related to the first special symbol determination, more random number values are associated with than the “miss” related to the first special symbol determination.
Further, for the variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long, more random number values are associated with the variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively short.

Therefore, the higher the jackpot reliability, the easier the icon change effect is executed, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability, the harder the icon change effect is executed.

The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the lottery result of step S1034 is a lottery result of executing the icon change effect (step S1035). If it is determined that the lottery result of executing the icon change effect is not obtained (step S1035: NO), the process proceeds to step S1037 described above. In this case, since the setting related to the icon change effect is not set, the icon change effect for the hold icon is not performed, and the icon change effect for the icon (the icon change success effect or the icon change effect) is not performed. (Including failure production) will not be performed.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the result of the lottery is to execute the icon change effect (step S1035: YES), it sets the icon change effect setting information in the sub RAM 133 (step S1036). Specifically, the following processing is executed. For example, by performing an effect lottery using a random number, whether to execute the icon change effect for the hold icon, and whether to execute the icon change effect for the icon corresponding to the hold icon. decide. When it is determined to execute the icon change effect targeting the hold icon, any one effect pattern is selected from a plurality of icon change effect effect patterns, and the selected icon change effect pattern is changed to the hold icon. Is set in the sub RAM 133 as the setting information of the icon change effect targeted for.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines to execute the icon change effect for the icon, the sub CPU 131 determines an initial display color of the icon and a final display color of the icon, and displays these display colors. Is set in the sub RAM 133 as the setting information of the icon change effect for the icon.

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1036 and sets the setting information of the icon change effect for the hold icon in the sub RAM 133, the sub CPU 131 executes the icon display command including this setting information in step S1037. Set in RAM133.

When the sub CPU 131 receives the change start command relating to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon, if the setting information of the icon change effect for the icon is stored in the sub RAM 133. Then, the following processing is performed.

For example, when the setting information indicating that the initial display color of the icon is white and the final display color of the icon is also white is stored, the sub CPU 131 causes the sub CPU 131 to perform step S1063 (see FIG. 52). In the notice effect pattern setting process of (see), the notice effect pattern for performing only the icon change failure effect of FIG. 13B is set. That is, a notice effect pattern for performing only an icon change failure effect as a so-called effect effect is set.

Further, for example, when the setting information indicating that the initial display color of the icon is white and the final display color of the icon is red is stored, the following effect pattern is used. It can be set.
For example, as the first notice effect pattern, it is possible to set a notice effect pattern in which only the icon change success effect (see FIG. 13A) for changing the display color of the icon from white to red is performed.
Further, as a second notice effect pattern, an icon change failure effect that fails to change the display color of the icon from white to red (see FIG. 13B) and rewind suggestion effect (FIG. 13C). Notice), a failure rewind effect (see FIG. 13D), and an icon change success effect that succeeds in changing the display color of the icon from white to red (see FIG. 13E). The effect pattern can be set.
Further, as a third notice effect pattern, an icon change failure effect that fails to change the display color of the icon from white to green (see FIG. 13B) and rewind suggestion effect (FIG. 13C). 13), the failed rewind effect (see FIG. 13D), and the higher icon change success effect that succeeds in changing the display color of the icon from white to red (higher than the green before rewind). 13F) can be set.

In this way, when a plurality of notice effect patterns can be executed, the sub CPU 131 executes, for example, a lottery using a random number to select any one notice effect pattern to give notice about the icon change effect. Set the production pattern.

[Variation start command reception processing by the production control board 130]
FIG. 52 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S106 of FIG. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the command received from the game control board 100 is the fluctuation start command (step S105: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG.

That is, the sub CPU 131 acquires the value at the time when the variation start command is received from the game control board 100, stores the value in the sub RAM 133 with respect to the effect random number appropriately updated by the above-described random number updating process (step S1060), and receives it. The fluctuation start command is analyzed (step S1061).

In this variation start command, as described above, the setting information of the symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process, the setting information of this symbol relates to the first special symbol determination, or the second special symbol determination The winning start opening information indicating whether it is one, the setting information of the variation pattern of the special symbol, the information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 and the like are included. Therefore, by analyzing the variation start command, the type and result of the special symbol determination can be specified. In other words, specify whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss, what kind of big hit it is if it is a big hit, and what kind of small hit it is if it is a small hit. You can Further, by specifying whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern for losing based on the setting information of the variation pattern, it is possible to determine whether it is necessary to perform the reachable effect or the reachless effect. .. In addition, the variation time of the special symbol can be specified based on the variation pattern setting information. Further, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the gaming state.

When the variation start command is analyzed, the sub CPU 131 executes variation effect pattern setting processing for setting the variation effect pattern of the variation effect associated with the variation display of the special symbol based on the analysis result (step S1062). By performing this variation effect pattern setting process, the variation mode of the decorative pattern, the presence or absence of the reach effect, the presence or absence of the pseudo continuous effect (reach rewind effect in this embodiment), the type of the decorative pattern forming the reach pattern, Types and contents of reach production, contents of pseudo-relation production, numbers shown by left small design and right small design of reach mode when executing SPSP reach and story reach, presence or absence of RUSH challenge battle, decorative design and small to stop permanently The type of symbol etc. is determined. In addition, when the preliminary determination information related to the second special symbol determination indicating the small hit is stored in the sub RAM 133, the three small symbols including the medium and small symbols indicating “V” are pseudo-stopped and then main stopped. The variation effect pattern for is set. In this case, the three small symbols that have been rotating at high speed are pseudo-stopped in a manner showing reach loses including the medium and small symbols indicating "V", and in response to the symbol confirmation command being transmitted from the game control board 100. These three small symbols are stopped.

Note that, for example, when the variation pattern of the second special symbol is extremely short, such as 1 second, the sub CPU 131 sets the variation effect pattern in which only the high speed rotation of the three small symbols is performed. When the pre-judgment information indicating the "small hit" is stored in the sub RAM 133 regarding the remaining hold related to the 2 special symbol judgment, in response to the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the game control board 100, "V The variation effect end command for permanently stopping the three small symbols indicating the streaks including the small and medium symbols indicating “” is set and transmitted to the image acoustic control board 140.

Next, the sub CPU 131 executes the notice effect patterns of various notice effects that mainly indicate the jackpot reliability, which are executed when the decorative symbol and the small symbol are variably displayed in the variable effect pattern selected in the process of step S162. The notice effect pattern setting process to be set is executed (step S1063). By executing the process of step S1063, as described above, the notice effect pattern of the icon change effect for the icon may be set.

Although detailed description is omitted, in this step S1063, for example, a step-up effect that can be stepwise developed to any step equal to or less than a predetermined step number is executed with a preset predetermined step number as an upper limit. If it is decided to execute, a process of deciding what kind of effect pattern the step-up effect is to be executed is performed. In addition, it is determined whether or not to execute the conversation notice production that displays a conversation window showing a state in which a predetermined character makes a dialogue, and when it is decided to execute, what kind of production pattern the conversation notice production is executed The process of determining is performed.

Next, the sub CPU 131 issues a variation effect start command for instructing the start of the variation effect in the variation effect pattern set in the process of step S1062 and the execution of the notice effect in the notice effect pattern set in the process of step S1063. It is set in the RAM 133 (step S1064).

This variation effect start command includes information indicating the variation effect pattern set by the process of step S1062 and information indicating the notice effect pattern set by the process of step S1063, and the command transmission process of step S50. Is transmitted to the image and sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. As a result, the variation effect and the notice effect in which the effect pattern is set in the effect control board 130 are realized by the image and sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

Subsequent to the process of step S1064, the sub CPU 131 subtracts “1” from the number of reservations stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S1065). Specifically, if the variation start command received from the game control board 100 is to notify the start of the symbol variation related to the first special symbol determination, the number of holding of the first special symbol determination is subtracted by "1". Update to the specified value. On the other hand, when the received variation start command is to notify the start of the symbol variation related to the second special symbol determination, the number of holding of the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1”.

[Processing during opening of small winning opening by the effect control board 130]
FIG. 53 is a detailed flowchart of the small winning opening opening process in step S33 of FIG. 49. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the small winning opening 19 is being opened (step S32: YES), first, the elapsed time when the measurement is started in the process of step S122 (see FIG. 50) (since the opening game is started. (Elapsed time of) has reached 7 seconds or not (step S331). If it is determined that the elapsed time has not reached 7 seconds (step S331: NO), the process proceeds to step S334, which will be described later.

When determining that the elapsed time has reached 7 seconds (step S331: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether the game ball is the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game based on whether or not the V winning command has already been received. It is determined whether the vehicle has already passed (step S332). Here, if it is determined that the game ball has already passed through the V winning opening switch 198 (step S332: YES), the process proceeds to step S334.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening switch 198 (step S332: NO), the remaining time countdown display (see FIGS. 21, 22D and 22E) is displayed. Execute (step S333). Specifically, a command for instructing the image and sound control board 140 to execute the remaining time countdown display is set in the sub RAM 133.

When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S333 and determines that the elapsed time has not reached 7 seconds (step S331: NO), it determines that the game ball has already passed through the V winning opening switch 198. When it does (step S332: YES), it is determined whether or not a V winning command is received from the game control board 100 (step S334).

When the sub CPU 131 determines that the V winning command has been received (step S334: YES), the end of the V area instruction display (see FIG. 21 and FIG. 22(C)) performed before the opening game is started is ended by the image sound. The control board 140 is instructed (step S335). Specifically, for example, an end command instructing the end of the V area instruction display is set in the sub RAM 133. Then, for example, the remaining time is determined based on whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the remaining time countdown display in the process of step S333 has reached the time required for the remaining time countdown display (5 seconds in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the countdown display is being executed (step S336). If it is determined that the remaining time countdown display is being executed (step S336: YES), the audiovisual control board 140 is instructed to end the remaining time countdown display (step S337). Specifically, for example, an end command instructing the end of the remaining time countdown display is set in the sub RAM 133.

[Result effect control processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 54 is a detailed flowchart of the result effect control process in step S43 of FIG. When the sub CPU 131 determines that it is the result effect start timing (step S42: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the winning effect pattern has been set (step S431).

The sub CPU 131 indicates that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit”, for example, when the variable display of the second special symbol of the time saving first rotation for producing the effect of the RUSH challenge battle is started. When a variation start command including information is received, in the variation effect pattern setting process of step S1062 (see FIG. 52), a variation effect pattern is set in which a challenge battle is performed after the reach is established and then a victory effect is performed. In this case, the "small hit" is notified in the variable display of the second special symbol of the first rotation, and the small hit game is started according to the "small hit". On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol of the time saving first rotation is started, when the variation start command including the information indicating that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “miss” is received, In the variation effect pattern setting process in step S1062 (see FIG. 52), the variation effect pattern for performing the defeat effect after the challenge battle after the reach is established is set.

By the way, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first rotation is “miss”, the variable effect pattern for performing the defeat effect is set as described above, but is temporarily suspended. In the case where one of the four second special symbol determinations that is to be determined as a “small hit” is included, as described above with reference to FIG. It is necessary to start the win effect, not the defeat effect, from the variable display of the second special symbol of the turn.
Therefore, when it is determined that the winning effect pattern has not been set (step S431: NO), the following processing is performed.

That is, if the sub CPU 131 determines that the winning effect pattern has not been set (step S431: NO), that is, if the defeat effect pattern is set because the first time saving rotation is a loss, the sub CPU 131 is put on hold. It is determined whether or not there is a "small hit" (step S432). Specifically, in the time saving game state, each time a hold command relating to the second special symbol determination is received from the game control board 100, the advance determination information included in the hold command is step S1032 (see FIG. 51). Since the data is stored in the sub RAM 133 by the processing, the sub CPU 131 determines whether the “small hit” is held in the hold based on whether or not the pre-determination information stored in the sub RAM 133 includes a “small hit”. It is determined whether there is a “win”.

When the sub CPU 131 determines that there is a "small hit" in the hold (step S432: YES), the second special symbol of the first speed-reducing first rotation is displayed in a variable display even if the first time-reducing first rotation is "miss". Since it is necessary to start the winning effect from, the setting information of the variable effect pattern stored in the sub RAM 133 indicating that the defeat effect is performed is rewritten to the variable effect pattern indicating that the winning effect is performed. By doing so, the defeat production pattern is updated to the victory production pattern (step S433).

Then, the sub CPU 131 sets, in the sub RAM 133, a win effect command including the setting information of the variable effect pattern indicating the updated win effect pattern to cause the image and sound control board 140 to start the win effect (step S434). This victory effect command is transmitted to the image and sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S50, whereby the challenge battle (see FIG. 24(H)) is followed by the victory effect (see FIG. 24(K)). Be seen.

On the other hand, when the time saving first rotation is a "small hit", when the variable display of the second special symbol of the time saving first rotation is started in order to notify the "small hit" of the time saving first rotation. Since it is already instructed to execute the variable effect in the variable effect pattern indicating the winning effect pattern, it is not necessary to instruct the start of the winning effect again, and therefore, when it is determined that the winning effect pattern is set. In (step S431: YES), the process proceeds to the command transmission process in step S50.

In addition, when the time saving first rotation is “miss”, in order to notify the “missing” of the time saving first rotation, when the variable display of the second special symbol of the time saving first rotation is started, it is defeated. Execution of the variable effect in the variable effect pattern indicating the effect pattern has already been instructed. For this reason, when there is no "small hit" in the hold 1 to the hold 4 (when all are "miss"), it is not necessary to instruct the start of the defeat production again. Therefore, if it is determined that there is no "small hit" in the hold (step S432: NO), a series of result effect control processing ends, and the processing proceeds to the command transmission processing of step S50.

[Timer interrupt processing by the image and sound control board 140]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the timer interrupt processing executed in the image and sound control board 140 will be described. Here, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt processing executed in the image and sound control board 140. The image and sound control board 140 repeatedly executes the series of processing illustrated in FIG. 55 at regular time intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as power-on and power-off. To do.

First, the overall CPU 141 executes an image output control process for controlling the image display on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on the command received from the effect control board 130 (step S71). This image output control processing will be described later in detail based on FIG.

Following the processing of step S71, the overall CPU 141 executes effect sound output control processing for outputting various effect sounds from the speaker 24 in synchronization with the effect display performed on the liquid crystal screen 5, or asynchronously ( Step S72).

Following the process of step S72, the overall CPU 141 executes a data transmission control process (step S73). Specifically, the data regarding the image and sound control performed by the image and sound control board 140 is transmitted to the effect control board 130. On the other hand, the effect control board 130 transfers the data received from the image and sound control board 140 to the lamp control board 150. As a result, the frame lamp 25, the panel lamp 37, the effect accessory 7 and the like are controlled so as to be synchronized with the effect being performed by the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24.

[Image Output Control Processing by Image Acoustic Control Board 140]
FIG. 56 is a detailed flowchart of the image output control process in step 71 of FIG. 55. First, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S711). If it is determined that the command has not been received (step S711: NO), the process proceeds to step S72.

On the other hand, when the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S711: YES), it sets the setting information included in the command in the control RAM 143 (step S712). Next, the overall CPU 141 determines how to display various effect images on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on the set setting information, creates a display list for controlling the drawing process of the VDP 144, and controls the display. The display list is stored in the RAM 143 (step S713), and the display list is set in the display list storage area of the VDP 144 (step S714). The display list is made up of a group of commands for instructing execution of drawing in frame units. The type of image to draw, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, the display priority, the display magnification, the rotation angle, and the transparency. It includes various parameters such as rate.

[Operation and effect of this embodiment]
According to the present embodiment, since both the failed rewinding effect and the reach rewinding effect can be executed, it is possible to obtain a high effect effect by the synergistic effect of these two types of rewinding effects.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first time reduction of the time saving is “miss”, the effect (during victory effect: performed during the variable display of the second special symbol of the first time reduction of the time saving). (See FIG. 30(A)), when the determination result of the second special symbol determination relating to the first time saving rotation is "small hit", the effect is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol of the first time saving rotation ( Victory effect: Refer to FIG. 28(B)). For this reason, it is possible to make the player feel unexpected, and as a result, it is possible to obtain a high staging effect.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the game ball has not passed the V winning opening switch 198 even after 7 seconds have passed since the opening game (the first round game) was started, the remaining time countdown The display is done. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a state in which the open game ends without the game ball passing through the V winning opening switch 198 during the open game.

[Other modifications]
It is needless to say that the configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other configurations and operation modes. Further, the order of processing, set values, threshold values used for determination, etc. in the above-described flowcharts are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. The screen diagrams and the like illustrated in the above embodiment are merely examples, and may be in other modes.

Further, as another embodiment, a part of the processing executed by the image/sound control board 140 is executed by the effect control board 130, or a part of the processing executed by the effect control board 130 is executed by the image sound control board. 140 may be made to perform. Further, the effect control board 130 and the image and sound control board 140 are integrally configured so that the processing executed by the effect control board 130 and the processing executed by the image and sound control board 150 are executed by one control board. May be.

1 gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine)
5 LCD screen (main LCD device)
11 1st starting opening 12 2nd starting opening 13 Large winning opening 16 Gate 17 Slide member 19 Small winning opening 24 Speaker 26 Production button 38 Sliding member 41 1st special symbol display 42 2nd special symbol display 43 1st special symbol Hold display 44 Second special design Hold display 45 Normal design display 46 Normal design Hold display 47 Game status display 50 Decorative design display area 51 Hold icon display area 52 Pertinent area 53 Small design display area 54 Right suggestion image 55 movement bar 56 movement icon 57 pseudo variation number suggestion image 100 game control board 101 main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 main RAM
130 Production control board 131 Sub CPU
132 sub ROM
133 sub RAM
140 image and sound control board 141 integrated CPU
142 Control ROM
143 Control RAM
144 VDP
145 Acoustic DSP
150 lamp control board 151 lamp CPU
152 lamp ROM
153 lamp RAM
191 Sliding member 192 Control piece 194 Small winning opening switch 195 Sliding member 197 Losing winning opening switch 198 V winning opening switch

Claims (1)

Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
Special game executing means for executing the special game when it is judged by the judging means to execute the special game,
It includes a presentation control means for controlling the effect, and
The effect control means,
It is possible to control execution by repeating a predetermined effect that performs an operation using a predetermined image a predetermined number of times,
The predetermined effect that is repeatedly executed is performed when the predetermined image is displayed in the first predetermined mode, or when the predetermined image is displayed in the second predetermined mode different from the first predetermined mode,
In the predetermined effect,
A first change effect in which the specific image is changed from the current display mode to the first predetermined mode by performing an operation using the predetermined image;
A second change effect in which the specific image is changed from the current display mode to the second predetermined mode by performing an operation using the predetermined image;
There is a maintenance effect of performing an operation using a predetermined image and maintaining the current display mode of the specific image,
The effect pattern for executing the predetermined effect,
A first effect pattern for executing the first change effect as the first predetermined effect;
A second effect pattern for executing the second change effect as the first predetermined effect;
A third effect pattern in which the maintenance effect is executed as the first predetermined effect and the second change effect is executed as the second predetermined effect;
There is a fourth effect pattern in which the maintenance effect is executed as the first predetermined effect and the maintenance effect is executed as the second predetermined effect.
When the predetermined effect is executed in the fourth effect pattern, the degree of expectation that the special game is executed does not increase,
When the predetermined effect is executed in the first effect pattern, the degree of expectation that the special game is executed is increased,
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second effect pattern, the degree of expectation that the special game is executed is higher than when the predetermined effect is executed in the first effect pattern,
In the gaming machine , when the predetermined effect is executed in the third effect pattern, the degree of expectation that the special game is executed is higher than when the predetermined effect is executed in the first effect pattern .

Images